JP6424926B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine or the like .

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in processing for controlling a gaming machine, control of gaming is performed by storing the created data in storage means in order to use it for control processing.

In such pachinko machines and the like , game machines have been proposed in which the increase in the amount of data stored in storage means required to execute game control has been suppressed.

JP 2012-65722 A

  In such pachinko machines and the like, there has been a demand for a game machine capable of executing more suitable control.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of executing suitable control.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is a display means for displaying discrimination information for performing discrimination and identification information comprising at least a plurality of symbol rows for informing the discrimination result by the discrimination means. And dynamic display means for displaying the symbols in the plurality of symbol rows in combination for showing the determination result after the dynamic display of the plurality of symbol rows, the dynamic display means It is possible to display the reach display mode in which the stop display is performed with a combination of symbols that can be a combination for showing the specific determination result among the plurality of symbol rows, except for one symbol row is configured, the gaming machine, as a dynamic display mode to dynamically display the identification information on the display unit, based on the determination result, determining a dynamic display mode from a plurality of dynamic display mode dynamic Specific to the display mode decision unit, all symbol row after being displayed in a different combination and the reach display mode in a dynamic display that is executed in the previous stopped and displayed, associated with the symbols that are stopped and displayed When the effect display means capable of causing the display means to display the effect display based on the start of the next dynamic display and the contents of the specific effect display displayed by the effect display means satisfy the predetermined condition And a special effect executing unit capable of executing a special effect for displaying the symbol row in the reach display mode, and the plurality of dynamic display modes include a specific motion determined in advance. Visual display mode is set, and the effect display means is configured to display the character associated with the symbol displayed after the previous dynamic display prior to the identification information dynamically displayed in the specific dynamic display mode. Effect display is intended to be displayed, said identification information is one in which the specific effect display is dynamically even display period displayed.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display means is configured by a liquid crystal display.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the determination means for performing the determination, the display means for displaying the identification information including at least the plurality of symbol rows for notifying the determination result by the determination means, and the plurality of Dynamic display means for displaying the symbols in the plurality of symbol rows in combination for showing the determination result after the symbol row is dynamically displayed; and the dynamic display means includes the plurality of dynamic display means Among the symbol rows, it is possible to display the reach display mode in which the symbols other than one symbol row can be stopped and displayed with a combination of symbols that can be a combination for indicating the specific determination result, and the game machine as a dynamic display mode to dynamically display the identification information on the display unit, based on the determination result, the dynamic display mode determining means for determining an dynamic display mode from a plurality of dynamic display modes , All symbol columns are stopped and displayed after being displayed in different combinations than the one before the reach display mode in the dynamic display executed, the next a specific effect display associated with the symbols that are stopped and displayed The effect display means capable of being displayed on the display means based on the start of the dynamic display of the symbol, and the content of the specific effect display displayed by the effect display means satisfies the predetermined condition; And a special effect execution unit capable of executing a special effect for displaying the reach display mode in the reach display mode, and a predetermined specific dynamic display mode is set to the plurality of dynamic display modes. And the effect display means displays the specific effect display related to the symbol displayed after the dynamic display immediately before the identification information dynamically displayed in the specific dynamic display mode. A shall, said identification information is one in which the specific effect display is dynamically even display period displayed.

According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the display means is constituted by a liquid crystal display, so that various display modes can be displayed. There is.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A)-(i) is a figure showing the kind of the 3rd design. (A) is a figure which showed typically the effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is a figure showing a state in which the left and right symbols in the conversation advance notice variation pattern are stopped and displayed, and (b) is a view showing an example of a display mode when a conversation is established in the conversation advance notice (C) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of conversation advance presentation effect. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of the speech advance presentation effect, (b) is a view showing a reach display mode after the speech advance presentation effect in the speech advance notice variation pattern, and (c) is It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode when the conversation in a conversation advance notice is not established. It is the block diagram which showed the electric constitution of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol, and (b) is the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol It is the model which showed the correspondence relation typically. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the content of ROM of MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is the model which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the conversation advance notice selection table of the character ROM of a display control apparatus. It is a figure showing typically an example of a conversation advance notice data table. It is the model which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing fluctuation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flow chart showing a display conversation annunciation process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a conversation announcement dedicated stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device It is the flowchart shown. It is a flowchart which shows the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning picture setting processing which is run by MPU inside the display control. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a time chart in the case where conversation of a notice of conversation of a pachinko machine in the second embodiment is established, and (b) is a case where conversation of the notice of a conversation in a pachinko machine in the second embodiment is not established. It is a time chart. (A) is a figure which showed the display mode of the state in which the front fluctuation of the fluctuation | variation in which the fluctuation | variation of the speech advance notification fluctuation pattern of the pachinko machine in the 2nd embodiment is performed was stopped is stopped. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode in case conversation in the notice of conversation of pachinko machine 10 in a form is established, and (c) is a conversation in the notice of conversation of pachinko machine 10 in a 2nd embodiment being not established. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode in a case, and (d) is a reduction display area displayed on the 3rd symbol display device, when conversation announcement of pachinko machine 10 in a 2nd embodiment is displayed. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second embodiment It is the flowchart which showed the conversation dummy announcement processing for display which is done. (A) is a time chart in the case where conversation of a notice of conversation of a pachinko machine in the third embodiment is established, and (b) is a case where conversation of the notice of a conversation in a pachinko machine in the third embodiment is not established. It is a time chart. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed fluctuation pattern command processing 2 which is executed by MPU inside the display control control in 3rd execution form. It is a time chart in case a conversation of conversation announcement of a pachinko machine in a 4th embodiment is materialized. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 3 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the speech advance announcement production processing which is executed by the MPU inside the display control in the 4th execution form. (A)-(b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the speech advance announcement of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically an example of the display effect selection table 1 of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment, (b) is a display effect selection table 2 of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. Is a diagram schematically showing an example. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the conversation advance notice data table of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing 4 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the conversation announcement processing 2 for a display performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the presentation selection table 3 for displays of the pachinko machine in the modification of 5th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the presentation selection table 4 for displays of the pachinko machine in the modification of 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the conversation announcement processing 3 for a display performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the modification of 5th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a notice of conversation of a pachinko machine in a 6th embodiment, (c) is a frame button in a notice of conversation of a pachinko machine in a 6th embodiment It is the figure which showed the display mode which alert | reports so that it may press to a person. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display mode which notifies a player that conversation advance notice production of a pachinko machine in a 6th embodiment is performed, and (b) is a pachinko machine in a 6th embodiment. FIG. 21C is a view showing an example of a display mode for notifying the player that the conversation advance presentation effect is not executed. FIG. 10C is a display mode when the conversation advance conversation of the pachinko machine in the sixth embodiment is not established. It is the figure which showed an example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring and presentation process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing 5 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the button depression production processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control in 6th execution form. (A)-(b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of conversation notice of a pachinko machine in a 7th embodiment, (c) is a display mode of a talk notice effect of a pachinko machine in a 7th embodiment It is a figure showing an example. (A) is the time chart which showed the case where the conversation in the notice of conversation of the pachinko machine in the 7th embodiment is established, (b) is the conversation in the notice of conversation of the pachinko machine in the seventh embodiment not being formed It is the time chart which showed the case. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the speech advance notice pattern table (off | missing) of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the conversation advance notice pattern table (per) of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically an example of conversation advance presentation data data table (10 seconds) of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment, (b) is a conversation announcement of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment It is the figure which showed typically an example of an effect data table (8 seconds). It is the figure which showed typically an example of the conversation advance presentation effect data table table (5 seconds) of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing 6 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process 3 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flow chart which showed button press production processing 2 performed by MPU in a display control device in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing 7 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern command process 3 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process 4 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 8th Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. Balls are played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination causes the ball inserted into the upper plate 17 to be guided to the ball firing unit 112a. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The player can change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or change the content of the effect of super reach, for example, by the player. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, 3 of “town stage,” “empty stage,” and “island stage”. There are two stages. Then, various effects such as fluctuation effects and reach effects that are performed along with entering the first ball entry port 64 described later (start winning) are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage It is done. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the variable effects are not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, "town stage" → "empty stage" → → "island stage" → "in the city stage" → ... It changes repeatedly in the following order. Further, immediately after the power is turned on, a "town stage" is set as an initial stage.

  On the other hand, when the normal reach effect is started, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach during the normal reach when developing from the normal reach to the super reach. If the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2), and the like can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player for driving a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Sensor 51a, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electric resistance (Not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is set to ON, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of operation, and the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes in accordance with the, and thereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "two-and-a-box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, a windmill and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, a first The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and a wood screw from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed by etc. The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is formed by dividing two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 into a substantially circular area (a winning opening etc. is disposed, and a shot ball is (Flowing down area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed when the ball enters the first entrance 64, and a normal symbol (first) when the ball passes the second entrance 67. 2) The lottery will be held. In the drawing of the special symbol performed for entering the first ball entrance 64, the determination of whether or not it is a big hit of the special symbol is performed, and when it is determined that the big symbol is a special symbol, the big hit type The determination of is also made. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is closed until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses) or 10 balls are won ) The opening is repeated five times (five rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, and therefore, a large number of prize balls are paid out from the normal time. As a jackpot type of special symbol, two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are provided, and after the end of the special game state as a added value after the jackpot end, on the game according to these jackpot types The player's value (game value) is given to the player.

  In addition, when the drawing of the special symbol (the first symbol) is performed, the variation display of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, The special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of ball entry is held up to four times at maximum, and the number of holding balls is the first symbol display It is shown by the device 37 and also in the third symbol display device 81. When the variation display is finished in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of holding balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the lottery of the next special symbol is performed, and the variation display according to the lottery Is started. The special winning opening 65a, which is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, is provided immediately below the first ball entry port 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player strikes a ball in an attempt to win a special winning opening 65a, so many balls enter the first ball entrance 64 as well. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of holding balls for the first entrance 64 is maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the second ball entrance 67, a pass / fail determination of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is performed. When the symbol is hit normally, the motorized accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. It will be in the state. That is, when it comes to the hit of the normal symbol, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, and as a result, the drawing of the special symbol becomes easy to be performed.

  In addition, when the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display device 83 and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed in the second symbol display device 83, the number of times of passage is suspended up to four times, and the number of holding balls is the first symbol display device 37 , And is also shown in the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variation display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of holding balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed, and the variation display according to the lottery Is started.

  As described above, as the jackpot type of the special symbol, there are provided two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B".

  If it becomes "big hit A", "big hit B", it will become special game state (16 R big hit) of the round number 16 rounds, and if it is "big hit A" as an added value after the big hit after that, it will be the next big hit In the meantime, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a high probability state of special symbol (during a special symbol oddity). On the other hand, if it is "big hit B", it will be a time saving state of a normal symbol until the lottery is executed 100 times (until fluctuation of the special symbol is started) after the big hit is finished.

  Here, the "special symbol high probability state" refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, a so-called probability state of the special symbol (during the special symbol oddity), in other words, the special gaming state (16R jackpot) It is the state of the game which is easy to shift to). On the other hand, when it is not "high probability state of special symbol" is called "low probability state of special symbol", it is a state where jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of special symbol, that is, jackpot probability of special symbol is normal Indicates the condition (normal condition of special symbol). In addition, "time symbol of the ordinary symbol" (during the short period of the ordinary symbol) means that the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol is increased, and the gaming state in which the ball is easy to enter the first ball entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not "normal symbol time reduction state" is called "ordinary symbol normal state", which indicates that the probability of hitting the symbol is normal, that is, the probability of hitting is lower than during time saving. .

  As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in this embodiment, regardless of the type of jackpot, the number of rounds at the jackpot and the probability variation period of the special symbol are made common, depending on the type of the jackpot "time symbol The period of becoming a "state" is changing. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or only a part of the type of jackpot may be changed. Also, for example, instead of changing the period in which the "time symbol of the normal symbol" is changed according to the type of jackpot, the time for opening the motorized part (not shown) attached to the first ball entrance 64, or once The number of times of opening the motorized part may be changed in the hit of the normal symbol. Moreover, in this embodiment, after the big hit end, it becomes "high probability state of special symbol" and "time saving state of normal symbol", but after "high probability state of special symbol" is finished, "time symbol of normal symbol" "" May be configured.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power supply or the like, it is always set to the "special symbol low probability state". After that, when it becomes the jackpot of the special symbol, it shifts to "the high probability state of the special symbol", and shifts to "the time saving state of the normal symbol".

  A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, at the upper right side upper part (right upper part of FIG. 2) of the game area. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform fluctuation display by indicating whether or not the drawing of the special symbol performed in conjunction with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is being executed, or performing fluctuation display or fluctuation As a stop symbol after the end, the special symbol (the first symbol) according to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown in the lighted state or the variation of the ball entering the first entrance 64 has not been executed. The number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display of the special symbol (the first symbol) is being performed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of ball entry is held up to four times at maximum The holding ball number is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also indicated by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first entry slot 64 is configured to be suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of times of suspension is not limited to four times, and is three times or less Alternatively, it may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds in the jackpot and an error display. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the luminescent color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states (high probability state of special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 with few LED by the combination of the luminescent color Or, it can display the time of the normal pattern, etc.). In addition, LED 37a not only indicates whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if it is a big hit according to the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B) The special symbol (the first symbol) is shown.

  Further, in the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is disposed on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (start winning combination), the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) is executed in the first symbol display device 37 using it as a trigger. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inches in size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right The columns are displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is used to display the first symbol display device A decorative display is performed according to the request. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. 4 is a view individually showing the symbols variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 5 is a view showing a display screen of the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG.

  As shown to FIG. 4 (a)-(i), the design which is 1 type of a pattern is comprised from nine types of main designs in which the number of "1"-"9" was each attached | subjected. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers of "1" to "9" to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, on the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81, three symbol rows Z1 are set as the display area in the horizontal direction. The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are vertically scrolled in ascending order in the symbol column Z1. The combination of the symbols stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1 is configured to notify the player of the jackpot of the game (when the jackpot game is started).

  As shown in FIG. 5B, on the display screen, three symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol column Z1. In the present embodiment, only the symbol line Z1 is used as the effective line, but a plurality of effective lines (for example, three effective lines in the horizontal direction and two effective lines in the diagonal direction on the display screen) are configured You may

  In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbol with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) corresponds to the "probable symbol", and when the big hit A which is 16R positive variation big hit occurs, the same The combination of odd variation symbols is displayed stopped. Also, the main symbol with an even number (2, 4, 6, 8) corresponds to the "normal symbol", and when the big hit B which is 16R normal big hit occurs, the combination of the same normal symbol is Stop display.

  In addition, the aspect of the fluctuation display of the symbols in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, and the number of symbol rows, the direction of the fluctuation display of symbols in the symbol rows, and each symbol row The number of symbols etc can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above-described symbol, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as a pattern.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating whether or not a lottery of a normal symbol performed as the ball passes through the second ball entry port 67 is being executed by a lighting state, or As a stop symbol after the end of fluctuation, the normal symbol (the second symbol) according to the lottery result of the normal symbol is shown by the lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. Variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "o"), the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 operates for a predetermined time. It becomes a state (it is open | released), and as a result, it is comprised so that it may be in the state which a ball | bowl easily enters into the 1st ball entrance 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to four times, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and also displayed in the second symbol holding lamp 84 as well. Ru. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and also the first symbol display device 37 And you may make it carry out using a part of 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. Similarly, lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Moreover, the passage of the ball in the second ball entrance 67 is not limited to four times the maximum number of holding balls, as in the first ball entrance 64, and is three times or less, or five times or more (For example, eight times) may be set. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be configured not to perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 through which a ball can enter is disposed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64, the first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A lottery of special symbols is made by the main control device 110, and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first ball entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls enter.

  Below the first ball entrance 64, a variable winning device 65 is disposed, and at a substantially central portion thereof, a horizontally-long rectangular specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed in the main controller 110 is a big hit, after the predetermined time (variation time) has passed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a big hit stop symbol. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (a jackpot of 16 rounds) in which a large amount of prize balls are paid out from the normal time. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is lit in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning A game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time for a predetermined number of times as a special gaming state is triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

  In the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13, adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate, an identification label and the like are provided, and the certificate paper and the like affixed to the adhesive space K1 is a front frame 14 Can be viewed through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball which has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided to an unshown ball discharge path through the out port 66. A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115 and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About pre-reading effect>
In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the various counters are acquired with respect to the holding ball of the special symbol, and various types of information (qualification, stop type , Fluctuation patterns) are determined (pre-read) in advance. When the pre-reading is finished, a winning information command (big hit winning command or off winning command) including various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, it determines whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect. In addition, about the detail of pre-reading effect, it abbreviate | omits about the detail for mentioning later.

<Electric Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

<Electric Configuration of Main Controller 110>
The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  In the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, as shown in FIG. 11, a big hit random number table 202a, a big hit type table 202b, a common symbol random number table 202c, a big hit variation pattern table 202d, and a release variation pattern table 202e It is provided. In the present embodiment, although the above is described as an example of the data table set in the ROM 202, other data tables, programs, and the like are also stored. The various data tables described above will be described in detail in describing the various counters described below.

  In main controller 110, lottery of special symbols, lottery of ordinary symbols, setting of display in first symbol display device 37, setting of display in second symbol display device 83, and setting of display in third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 9, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display setting in the third symbol display device 81. Used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to

  In order to select the jackpot type of the special symbol and the first random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the special symbol, in the drawing of the special symbol and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first contact type counter C2 used for the first, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the out of special symbol, and the first initial value random number used to set the initial value of the first contact random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 18), and some counters are periodically updated in the main processing (see FIG. 26). The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas is a first ball entrance The values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball 64, respectively. The RAM 203 is also provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas), and in each of these areas, a ball is on the left and right The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored according to the timing of passing through any one of the second ball entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), and is 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 299) It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

  The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the storage area 203a. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the big hit random number table 202a (refer to FIG. 11) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is the big hit random number If it matches with the value of the jackpot random number set by the table 202a, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this jackpot random number table 202a is for high probability (special symbol of high probability) for special symbol low probability (period of being low probability state of special symbol) and high probability of special symbol from that low probability It is divided into two types, one for the high probability state (period)), and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. Thus, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot. The jackpot random number table 202a for high probability of the special symbol and the jackpot random number table 202a for low probability of the special symbol are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) And return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol hold of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number to be a big hit of a special symbol, that is, if it is a random number to be a special symbol out of order, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is at the time of removal of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that will be the big win of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 The display mode is for the jackpot of the special symbol. In this case, a specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first random number counter C1, at the low probability of the special symbol, there are three random number values that become the big wins of the special symbol, and the random number "7, 107, 282" is the jackpot random number for low probability It is stored in the table 202a. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 300, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 3, so the probability of becoming a big symbol of a special symbol is "1/100".

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 30 random number values that become the jackpot of the special symbol, and the value is "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 ", the jackpot random number table 202a for high probability It is stored. As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 300, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 30, so the probability of being a big symbol of a special symbol is "1/10".

  In the present embodiment, the random number value for the big hit stored in the big hit random number table 202a for the low probability time and the random number value for the big hit stored in the high hit random number table 202a for the high probability time Each jackpot random number value is set so as not to be a duplicate value. Here, if there is a value that is always used regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 as a random number value that will be a jackpot, the random number value may be input from the outside, and it may be easy to illegally attract a jackpot. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state of special symbol or low probability state of special symbol), change the random number value to be a big hit Since it can be made difficult to predict the random number value which becomes the jackpot of a special symbol by this, suppression against fraud can be aimed at.

  Further, the value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 10A, the jackpot type when the random number value is “0 to 59” in the first hit type counter C2 is “jackpot A”. In addition, the jackpot type when the value is “60 to 99” is “jackpot B”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. In addition, the random number value for determining the big hit type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2 is set by the big hit type table 202b, and this table is the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided inside.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reach is generated, the final stop design shifts by only one before and after the reach design. "Launch front and back out of reach" (for example, 98, 99) and "Leach other than front and back out of reach" (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop design stops at other than front and back Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected with "complete out" (e.g., a range of 0 to 89) in which a reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol holding ball storage of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the area 203a.

  In addition, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Moreover, in this embodiment, this table is divided into those for high probability of special symbol and low probability for special symbol, and the range of the random number value set for each stop type of out according to the table Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

  For example, in the high probability state, a table for high probability when the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is wide 0 to 89 so that reach effect is not selected more than necessary since jackpots are easily generated Is selected, and "complete removal" is likely to be selected. In this table, "longitudinal outreach" narrows to 98, 99 and "non back and forth out of reach" also narrows to 90 to 97, making "front and back out of reach" and "reach other than back and forth out of reach" difficult to select. In the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first entrance 64, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as narrow as 0 to 79. Table is selected and it becomes difficult to select "completely out".

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than back and forth deviation” is wide as 80 to 97, and “reach other than back and forth deviation” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach display with a long rendering time, so it is possible to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first ball entrance 64 and the fluctuation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It becomes easy to be done. Also in the latter table, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear outreach” is set to 98, 99.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). It is acquired at the timing when the game ball enters the first entrance 64 and is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110. A rough display mode such as so-called normal reach or super reach is determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 Ru. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 26) to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern tables 202d and 202e storing random number values for determining one fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  In the fluctuation pattern table, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d and a deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e (see FIG. 11) are respectively set. For example, the variation pattern table 202e for outlier specifies "off (for long time)", "off (for short time)", various "normal reach", various "super reach", and various "special reach" In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d for jackpot A and jackpot B common use, various common common reach, various common super reach, and common special reach are defined. Here, as one of the fluctuation patterns for deviation, a deviation conversation notice fluctuation pattern is set. In addition, a per-conversation notice variation pattern is set as one of the “shared super reach” types. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type).

  6 (a) to 6 (c) and 7 (a) to 7 (b) are diagrams schematically showing an example of the out-of-call conversation notice variation pattern or the per-call notice variation pattern. After the variation of the third symbol is started in the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 6A, the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, and the middle symbol is high speed. Or it will be in the state of fluctuating at low speed. As shown in FIG. 6A, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped with symbols different from each other (temporarily stopped in a non-reach state).

  As shown in FIG. 6B, a comment is displayed in a balloon (a comment window) from the character of the third symbol (in the present embodiment, the character of the turtle) stopped at the left symbol. After that, the comment of the conversation with respect to the comment of the left pattern is displayed by the balloon from the character of the third pattern (in the present embodiment, the dolphin character) stopped at the right pattern. As described above, in the out-of-speak conversation notice variation pattern or the per-speech notice variation pattern, the notice display for performing a conversation is executed with the symbols temporarily stopped on the left symbol and the right symbol. When the content of the conversation is established as shown in FIG. 6 (b), as shown in FIG. 6 (c), the effect announcement of whether or not to reach is executed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6 (b), a comment is established in which the character with the right symbol has a conversation of "Good !!!" while the character with the left symbol has a comment "Can we compete?" It indicates that the conversation was established.

  When the conversation is not established, “························································································································· Further, in the present embodiment, it has been shown that the conversation is not established by the fact that the right symbol character does not reply anything, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and when the right symbol character makes a comment "Yaday !!" Also corresponds to the fact that the conversation was not established. In addition, it is sufficient to indicate that the conversation is not established when the contents of the conversation between the left symbol and the right symbol do not match, not limited to the content described in the present embodiment.

  When the conversation is established, as shown in FIG. 6C, a display mode in which the character "turtle" in the left symbol and the character "shark" in the right symbol compete against the goal is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 7 (a), when the character “turtle” on the left symbol reaches the goal earlier than the character “shark” on the right symbol, the left symbol and the right symbol as shown in FIG. 7 (b) The third symbol of "turtle" is displayed on the screen, and it will reach reach. That is, the conversation announcement is an announcement display mode for notifying the player whether or not to reach. After that, in the out-of-speech notice change pattern or the per-speech notice change pattern, a predetermined change display mode (dynamic display mode) such as normal reach or super reach is displayed.

  In addition, when the contents of the conversation are not established, or even if the contents of the conversation are established, if the reach status is not reached by the subsequent notice effect, the determined middle symbol is stopped and the lottery result is out Is notified. Thus, in the per-conversation notice variation pattern, it is configured to be always in the reach state. Further, the off-the-early-prediction fluctuation pattern is set both in the reach state and in the non-reach state, and is configured to be different depending on the out-of-conversation notice pattern selected by the lottery.

  In this manner, when the conversation announcement is executed, the player can expect the conversation to be established and become a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to play the game in anticipation of the start of the change in which the conversation announcement is executed, and it is possible to prevent the game from being bored prematurely.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt processing, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67 which is either left or right. It is acquired at the time of being stored, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  And the value of the random number which becomes a hit of the normal symbol is set by the normal symbol per random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is the random number table per normal symbol 202c. When it agrees with the value of the random number which becomes the hit which is set by, it is judged as the hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this random pattern per random symbol table 202c is for low probability of normal symbol (during normal condition of normal symbol), and high probability (normal symbol) which has a high probability of becoming a hit of normal symbol from the time of low probability The number of jackpot random numbers included in each of the two types is set differently. Thus, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be hit.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (b), at the time of low probability of the normal symbol, there are 24 random values that hit the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random number values are stored in the random number per random symbol table 202c for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

  If the ball passes through the second entry port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 obtains a normal symbol. Is displayed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 obtained is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be won, and after the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol “o” is lighted and displayed as), and the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "0.5 seconds x 2 times" may be opened.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, there are 200 random number values that become the jackpot of the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the random number per random symbol table 202c for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 200, so the probability of becoming a big symbol of a special symbol is "1 / 1.2."

  If the ball passes through the second entry port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 selects the normal symbol. Is displayed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol “o” is lighted and displayed as), and the first entrance 64 is opened “one second × twice”. Thus, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds" as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and furthermore, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first ball entry port 64. In addition, a table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit or not from the value (random number value) of the second random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only for “one second × 2 times” when the normal symbol comes into contact, but it is opened. The time and the number may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18). And is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 is a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored in addition to various counters shown in FIG. 9, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of.

  The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on due to the cancellation of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power interruption. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 26), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 23) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 8, the RAM 203 has a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and a middle time It has a counter 203 e and other memory areas 203 z.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas is a first random number counter C1. The respective values of the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired at the timing when the ball reaches the first entry slot 64 (start winning), and the acquired data includes four reserve areas ( Among the vacant areas of the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main controller 110, when a lottery of a special symbol is performed, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is an execution area Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution area, determination such as drawing of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the hold first area to the execution area, the hold first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which winning data stored in other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is packed into a hold area (hold first area to hold third area) with one smaller area number. To be done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which data of winning is stored.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the ball wins to the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), and as soon as each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is obtained according to the starting winning, the original special symbol Aside from the jackpot lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the values of the acquired counters C1 to C3. As described above, before the drawing of the original special symbol is performed, various kinds of information obtained when the original drawing is performed based on the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to the starting winning combination. The prediction of the information will be described later, when the lottery result of the special symbol is read ahead. In addition, a pass / fail, stop classification, a fluctuation pattern etc. correspond as various information.

  Then, when the pre-reading is finished, a winning information command including various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the pass / fail, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information to save the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. Store in 223a.

  In the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the success / failure judgment result (prefetching judgment result) determined in S407 of the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 described later is also held. It is respectively stored in the first to fourth areas.

  The regular symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes either the left or right second entrance port 67, and the acquired data is divided into four holding areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similar to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning sequence is held. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area), the determination such as the lottery of the normal symbol is performed.

  It should be noted that when data is shifted from the first holding area to the execution area, the first holding area becomes empty, so similar to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the winning combinations stored in the other holding areas A shift process is performed to pack data into a reserve area with a small area number. In addition, data shift is also performed only for the holding area in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is a variation display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning combination) It is a counter which counts the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and the ball enters the first entrance 64 and 1 to the maximum value 4 each time the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. It adds (refer FIG. 21, S404). On the other hand, the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by one each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see FIG. 19, S205).

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number of holding N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (see FIG. 19, S206, FIG. 21, S405). The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 holds the holding ball of the variation display held on the main control device 110 by the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203 c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display controlled by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is actually held in the main control 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if it deviates from that, it is possible to correct the deviation by means of the number of balls command received next.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of holding balls every time the number of holding balls changes. Send a ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the number-of-held-balls number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of held balls notified by the number-of-held-cells-for-display command. In the transliteration mode, although not shown, one “●” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for one hold.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is the number of holding balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entry hole 67 It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 each time the ball passes through the second entry port 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. (See FIG. 23, S704). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is newly executed (see FIG. 22, S605).

  When the ball passes either the left or right second entrance 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number per hit The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (FIG. 23, S705). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes either the left or right second entrance 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Not (FIG. 23, S703: No).

  The time saving counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and if the value of the time saving counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol Indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol if the value of the time counter 203 e is zero. At this time, the initial value of the counter 203e is set to zero, and a lottery for a special symbol is performed in the main control unit 110, and a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set every time it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot Be done. That is, when it becomes the big hit of the special symbol, the value according to the big hit type is newly set regardless of how many the value of the time-and-time counter 203 e is.

  Specifically, it is set to 100 when it is determined that the "big hit B" (see FIG. 19, S214). Thereafter, 1 is subtracted each time the variation effect of the special symbol is finished, until the value of the hour / hour counter 203e becomes 0 (FIG. 19, S217).

  When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time counter during the short time 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, the normal symbol per symbol based on the random symbol table 202c for high probability is used. While the lottery is performed, if the value of the time counter 23e is 0, the lottery of the normal symbol is performed based on the random symbol per table random symbol table 202c for low probability (see FIG. 22, S610 and S611).

  The other memory area 203z is an area in which various other flags, data, etc. required for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to control the pachinko machine 10 are stored.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specified winning opening 65a A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 is outputted from the various switches 208. Various processings are executed based on the control signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

<Electric Configuration of Audio Lamp Controller 113>
The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) Control of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display). The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, or at the time of super reach The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110, the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, etc., and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 stores control programs necessary for various controls, various data, and the like. The ROM 222 stores a fluctuation pattern table in which fluctuation patterns are stored, and is determined by the main control device 110 based on fluctuation pattern commands output from the main control device 110 and various winning information commands. It is comprised so that discrimination | determination of a fluctuation pattern is possible.

  In the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, there are a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, an effect counter 223e and other memory areas 223z. At least provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first to fourth areas), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning combination when the start winning combination is achieved in the main control device 110. The main control unit 110 predicts (estimates) various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when the drawing of the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning combination is performed, and the predicted various information is The main control unit 110 notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 by a prize information command.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, when the winning information command is received, the various information (pass, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area), the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). Be done. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to an earlier winning is stored, and data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored in the first area.

  Similar to the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control unit 110, the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is a fluctuation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter which counts and holds the number of balls (waiting number) of the holding of the fluctuation effect held in the main control unit 110 up to four times.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can not directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of holding balls with the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of holding balls of the variation display is added by entering the ball into first entrance 64, or the variation display in the special symbol is executed in main controller 110. When the number of holding balls is subtracted, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the holding ball number command. The symbol holding ball number counter 223b is stored (see FIG. 29, S1409). Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223 b is used to display the number-of-held-ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of {circle over (1)}, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball number for the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled to display the symbol on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223 b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol holding ball number counter 203 a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is set to ON when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see FIG. 29, S1402), and the fluctuation display setting in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. It is set to off (see FIG. 30, S1502). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is set to ON when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1405 in FIG. 29), and the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. Is set to off (see S1607 in FIG. 30).

  The effect counter 223 e is a counter value used to select an effect or the like of an advance notice. The effect counter 223 e is a counter value that is incremented and updated one by one each time the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed, and is updated from the initial value of 0 and the upper limit value It is repeatedly updated in the range up to 99. Note that the effect counter 223d is a counter value that is set to 0, which is an initial value, when a power failure occurs.

  The RAM 223 further includes another storage area 223z for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 29) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is performed. The command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 (variation Control). The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

<Electric Configuration of Display Control Device 114>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, bus lines 240 and 241 have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected via the bus line 240 to the output side of the input port 238. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is another model in which the lottery probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one big symbol of a special symbol are different. The display control device 114 is converted into a common part and the cost is reduced because there are models of the same specifications.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the speed for reading the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instruction that constitutes the control program In the case where a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, described later, in the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. The second program storage area 234a1 for storing, the character storage area 234a2 for storing data of images (such as characters) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the conversation notice or conversation notice effect displayed in the conversation notice variation pattern It has at least a conversation advance notice data table 234a3 which is a data table for display.

  Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this manner, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234 a or the like. Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured by two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program. From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is used as one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234 d, the ROM controller 234 b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234 c from the NOR ROM 234 d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset is released are NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If it has been, the character ROM 234 has to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S1602 in FIG. 31) executed after the boot process (see S1601 in FIG. 32) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 17) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 33B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the video RAM 236 for ordinary use. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform the image drawing process and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is on, and the power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character pattern area In addition to the error message image area 235f, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on time variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power on, and the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, which displays the lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by the fluctuation effect when it is done.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1603 and S1604 in FIG. 31).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b immediately after power on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at the time of the power on, and the main image at the time of the power on (in this embodiment, The third symbol display device 81 displays characters (power-on characters).

  At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the main image at power on. On the display screen, the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "○" in the lower right position toward the screen and the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "X" in the same position as the "○" symbol, fluctuation period The display is repeated alternately. Then, based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 and the stop type command, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 cause the lottery performed by the main control unit 110. The result is judged, and in the case of "big hit of special symbol", the "○" image is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the change production, and in the case of "out of special symbol", the "×" image is after the stop of the change production Display for a fixed period.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs to draw the main image. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall may confirm the main image when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 While transferring data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, wait until transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235 is completed without fear that the operation has stopped. Can.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. It is possible to immediately confirm that this is the case, and further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the power change image area when the power is turned on. The power-on-time change image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on time change image resident on 235b, and the “o” and “x” images are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform simple fluctuation presentation using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Further, at the stage when the main image at power on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect image at power on is already resident in the power on fluctuation image area 235b. When the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately it can.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235 d is an area for residence of the third symbol used in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 8) with the numerals "0" to "9" being the third symbols are resident. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 performs the fluctuation effect, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to start fluctuating production quickly. Therefore, after entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64, although the fluctuation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37, the fluctuation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an unintended condition.

  In addition, the third symbol area 235 d corresponds to the main symbols consisting of the rear symbols of the various characters shown in FIGS. 4A to 4I as main symbols without the numbers “0” to “9”. The image data to be stored is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. Be Thereby, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in the demonstration effect, a main symbol not numbered is displayed as the third symbol. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235 e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e, whereby display control is performed. When changing the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but in the character pattern area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading out image data previously resident. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message pictorial area 235 f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the graphic area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is determined in advance.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time elapses with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data It is an area where transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among transfer image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, variation effects, round effects A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display fluctuation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. When the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the fluctuation effect is also received. For example, when the change effect is started, if the stop type of the change effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the end is finally displayed stop, while the stop type of the change effect is big hit A, big hit B If it is either, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot is finally displayed stopped. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect, and can easily determine the game value to be awarded according to the jackpot type.

  The ending effect notifies the player of the end of the special game state, and informs the player of the game value (short period of time of the normal symbol) to be given to the player after the end of the jackpot, or the special symbol being held. This is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the lottery.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next change effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has passed since the one change effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. In addition, as for the display data table which is a display data table for the fluctuation effect, if there are 32 patterns of the fluctuation effect pattern to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation effect pattern and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. Note that if the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the display data table, one back surface image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) As drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, light of the image Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect representing insertion, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back surface image type, is defined. This back surface type indicates which of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of the "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage") is displayed, or the back surface A to C Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. Moreover, when specifying to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface type is also described together with information specifying which back surface image to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. Also, the range of the rear view image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear surface image different from the rear surface A to C, the rear surface image to be displayed is specified from the rear surface type.

  In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information (for example, of the range corresponding to the initial position) of the position information together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time (high speed fluctuation period). While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The start address of the display data table "0000H" describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 13) describes the data table. "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 15) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

<Conversation notice data table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the details of the conversation advance notice selection table 234a3 will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, among the third symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the conversation advance notice selection table 234 a 3, types of symbols displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, and the selected conversation It is selected by determining whether the advance fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern in which a conversation is established or a fluctuation pattern in which a conversation is not established. In FIG. 14, the conversation advance notice selection table 234 a 3 is simplified and shown, but when the conversation notice and the conversation to be respectively displayed for the combination of each symbol are established, the conversation advance notice effect (FIG. And a conversation notice data table (see FIG. 15) for setting the display of FIG. 7 (a)) are preset.

  The speech advance notice data table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIGS. 6 (b) to 6 (c) and FIG. 7 (a), the conversation advance notice data table displays a comment on the conversation advance notice and a conversation advance notice shown in FIG. 6 (c) and 7 (a). Each is set to an address corresponding to the display timing.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, when the pointer is updated to the address 0064H, the "3 symbols" of the turtle is displayed stopped in the left symbol column of the third symbol display device 81 (provisional stop display of shaking fluctuation) The display data is set such that the character "Can compete?" Is displayed together with the balloon from the character of the turtle. In addition, the coordinate of (X, Y) shown in FIG. 15 is simplified and shown in figure the data of the display position which displays a left figure and a comment. Although omitted in FIG. 15, similar display data is set to the subsequent addresses as long as the display mode continues to be displayed. After that, when the pointer is updated to the address 008CH, in addition to the left pattern described above, the “7 symbol” of the dolphin is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the character of “Good yo !!” Is displayed. Thereafter, as long as the display mode is displayed, similar display data is set to the subsequent addresses.

  After that, as display data transferred when the pointer is updated to the address 012CH, display data of conversation advance presentation effects as shown in FIG. 6C and FIG. 7A is set. In this conversation advance presentation effect, display data to be displayed by moving a character or the like is sequentially set at an address after address 012 CH.

  This conversation advance notice data table is also set in the display data table buffer 233d of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, transferred by the transfer data table described later, and the drawing list (see FIG. 17) is generated. Note that, as with the display data table shown in FIG. 13, various data such as display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, etc. are also set in this conversation advance notice data table (see FIG. 15), but for simplicity In the present embodiment, the description is omitted.

  As described above, since the conversation advance notice data table for displaying the notice of conversation is set separately from the display data table corresponding to the data table of the conversation advance notice variation pattern, the display data table corresponding to the change pattern is displayed. The number can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the conversation notice data table is set separately from the display data table corresponding to the conversation notice change pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the conversation notice data is displayed in the display data table of the conversation notice change pattern. The display contents set in the table may also be set.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table and the conversation advance notice data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the sprite used in the effects specified in the display data table Among the image data, transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 to the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Are described (the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 16 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined to mean (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 12).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the display data table and the conversation advance notice data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (see FIG. In the example of 16, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the display content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 15) described later is created. Then, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 16, when the pointer 233 f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the relevant address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display on the third symbol display device 81 the character of "initial setting" which is the image at power on (main image at power on and fluctuation image at power on). It is a flag. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on change image area 235b of the resident video RAM, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on change image is transferred. , And in the main process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. 31, S1605). Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process. It is set to off (see FIG. 41 (b), S3405).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see FIG. 33 (b) and S2101). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see FIG. 33 (b), S2108) and the simplified display setting process (figure) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 33 (b), see S2109). On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 34 to 37) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 38 to 40) are performed.

  Also, the simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 42A and S3301), and the simplified image display flag 233c is on. Since the resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists, the resident image transfer setting process for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (see FIG. 42B and S3302) If the simplified image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 43) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 17) in which the contents of the image drawing instruction for the image is described is generated. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 17) describing the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data that means that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f one by one. (That is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 17) described later (see FIG. 17) describing the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from which the image controller 237 completes the image drawing process for one frame (FIG. And S2103), pointer update processing (see S3005 of FIG. 40) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f every time the pointer 233f is updated, and a drawing list to be described later. The transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer is to be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while creating (see FIG. 17), and the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Also, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2 ···), characters (character 1 · character 2 ··· Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite, such as a design. The drawing information also includes drawing information set based on the conversation advance notice data table. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value. Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233 j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) , Characters (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number pattern 1, holding ball number pattern 2, ..., display contents of conversation announcement, error symbol (not shown), corresponding to each sprite Detailed information is described.

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front. Thereby, when the drawing content based on the conversation advance notice data table is set, the display information can be displayed on the front side more than the drawing information set in the display data table corresponding to the conversation advance notice variation pattern.

  By configuring in this way, even when the display of the conversation advance notice is not displayed, the conversation advance notice variation pattern can be shown to the player as if it is another change pattern by not setting the conversation advance notice data table. And the number of fluctuation patterns can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, by setting the image corresponding to the conversation advance notice data table at the end of the drawing list, the display mode of the conversation advance notice is displayed on the foremost side, but the present invention is not limited thereto. When the image based on the data table is set, only the image based on the conversation notice data table may be set in the drawing list. With this configuration, the process of creating the drawing list can be simplified and the control load can be reduced.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, the V-interruption process (FIG. 33 (b (b Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see FIG. 38, S3008). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S1602 in FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" which indicates that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when the transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 231. It will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to “on” which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a. Also, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite always becomes unstored by the image data of the one sprite being stored. So, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

  Further, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and transfers the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see FIG. 43, S3517). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction of the image data is set (see FIG. 43, S3518). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of the image data is canceled. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c). The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is zero, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is one. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see FIG. 44, S3602).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. Every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 33B) is performed, the process is performed (see FIG. 44, S3602).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

<Control Process Executed by MPU 201 of Main Control Device 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated upon turning on the power, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer activated periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment) There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, When 299, 99, 99, 239) are reached, they are cleared to 0 respectively. The updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, special symbol variation processing for setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 while executing processing for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104), and thereafter, The start winning process associated with the winning on the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for performing display in the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S106), and the through gate passes along with the passage of the ball at the second entrance port 67 A process is performed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and firing the ball on condition that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process to determine the on / off of the The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device It is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81, and the like.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is currently in the middle of a special symbol (S201). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: Yes), this processing ends.

  If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number of holding N of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation A holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 26) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c from the holding ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223 .

  After setting the holding ball number command in the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). In addition, the special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If has not passed (S209: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol variation start process is executed, a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, according to the value of the first random number counter C1 it is determined whether or not the big win of the special symbol, and in the case of the big win of the special symbol, according to the value of the first type counter C2 Whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B occurs, the red LED is turned on. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  After the process of S210 is completed, when the variable display under execution in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether it is a jackpot of a special symbol (S211). If the lottery result this time is a big hit of the special symbol (S211: Yes), of the two types of big hit of the special symbol (big hit A, big hit B), it is determined what the big hit type is (S212), big hit type If is the jackpot A, the setting regarding the jackpot A is executed (S213). In the setting relating to the jackpot A, the number of jackpot rounds (16 rounds in the present embodiment) and the probability variation jackpot are set (S213). In the case of the jackpot B, the setting of the jackpot round number (16 rounds in the present embodiment) and the number of time reductions (100 times in the present embodiment) are set (S214). Then, the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S215), and the present process is ended.

  In the process of S211, if the current lottery result is the deviation of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S216). If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203e is 1 or more (S216: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S217), and the process is ended. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0 (S216: No), the process of S221 is skipped and this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). The special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 19) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), and the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. On the basis of the values of the various counters stored in the table, a lottery of “big hit of special symbol” or “out of special symbol” is made (decision determination), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 It is a process for determining the production pattern (the fluctuation production pattern) of the fluctuation production to be done.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired To do (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a high probability state (during a definite change) (S302). When in the high probability gaming state (S302: Yes), the lottery result is obtained based on the jackpot random number table 202a for high probability (S304).

  In the process of S304, based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301, and the jackpot random number table 202a for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is hit is acquired. Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 30 random numbers stored in the jackpot random number table 202a for high probability. As mentioned above, as a random value which becomes the big hit of the special symbol, “4, 11, 28, 38, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168 , 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 "are set, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the number of these rounds Is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol when the random numbers match. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S306.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state) in the process of S302 (S302: No), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and for low probability Based on the jackpot random number table 202a, a lottery result of whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is acquired (S305). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random number of 3 stored in the high probability random number table 202a for low probability. Three random numbers, "7, 107, 282", are set as the jackpot of the special symbol, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number of those hits. , Determined to be a jackpot of special symbols. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S306.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S304 or S305 is the jackpot of the special symbol (S306), and it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is (S306: Yes), The display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B) (S307). Further, in order to cause the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S308). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S308, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, check the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, and based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the fluctuation pattern table (not shown), design fluctuation such as normal reach or super reach Determine the variation pattern (variation time). The relationship between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is previously defined by this fluctuation pattern table.

  For example, as the fluctuation patterns for outliers, various types of “outside”, “normal reach out”, “super reach out”, and “special reach out” are defined. As the fluctuation pattern for jackpot A, various “permanent jackpot normal reach” various, “permanent jackpot super reach” various, “various jackpot special reach” various are defined , "Normal jackpot super reach" various, "normal jackpot special reach" various are defined.

  In the process of S306, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S306: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S309). In the process of S309, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and the display mode corresponding to the symbol is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of out of step is determined from the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (S310). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the dislocated symbol is determined. At this time, as in the process of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation pattern of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach or super reach based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determine the (variation time).

  When the process of S308 or S310 ends, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S308 or S310 is set (S311). A stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type (the stop type at the time of the big hit) is set (S312). The fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 26). Ru. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S312 is finished, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) to determine whether or not the first ball entrance 64 has a winning (start winning), and there is a starting winning These are processes for executing hold processing of values indicated by various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number of holding times N of the variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S402) . Then, it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  And if there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: No) or if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S415. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol holding ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). And the ball holding number command which shows the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c changed by calculation is set (S405).

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 26) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c from the holding ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223 .

  After setting the holding ball number command by the process of S405, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the change type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above Each value is stored in the first area of the vacant holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is made the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area. Thereafter, the process of S407 is performed.

  In the process of S407, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in S406 is determined to be a big hit at the start of fluctuation. Whether the gaming state at the start of the change is the high probability gaming state or the low probability gaming state is determined from the determination result of the holding ball stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and the judgment of success or failure is Perform in advance (preliminary judgment of the judgment result). In the process of S407, not only the success / failure determination result but also the stop type and the variation pattern are determined and stored in the corresponding hold area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  In the process of S407, when it is determined that it is a big hit (S407: Yes), a big hit winning command which is a type of winning information command is set based on the stop type and the fluctuation pattern (S408). Here, for example, if the jackpot A and the super reach, the jackpot winning command corresponding to it is set. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S402 that the variation is out (S407: No), it is determined whether the variation pattern is the super reach (S409). If it is determined in the process of S409 that the variation pattern is a super reach (S409: Yes), an outreach reach winning command, which is a type of winning information command, is set (S409). On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern different from the super reach (S409: No), a loose winning command which is a type of winning information command is set (S411). The winning information command is configured such that the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can identify the type of the variation pattern to be selected. That is, when the speech advance notice variation pattern is a variation pattern to be selected, the variation pattern can be identified.

  The winning information information command is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when it is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the first ball entrance 64. It is a process for controlling the open time of the motorized part and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is in the middle of a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol), the opening and closing control of the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made in the second symbol display device 83. Included. As a result of the determination, if it is in the middle of the hit of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: Yes), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602). If the display mode 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number M of holding the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the time-span-middle counter 203 e of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S 608). The hour-time counter 203e is a counter indicating whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, and if the value of the time-shortening counter 203e is 1 or more, the time-saving state of the pachinko machine 10 is the normal symbol If the value of the time counter 203 e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  If the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, the lottery of the normal symbol is configured to be less likely to hit. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (ie, in the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so the motorized prize associated with the first entrance 64 is opened This is for the purpose of suppressing the entry of the ball intended to be won by the special winning opening 65a into the first ball entry port 64 as much as possible. In addition, since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first ball entrance 64, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the first ball entrance 64 in the big hit of the special symbol, the first Many balls enter the ball entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of holding balls for the first ball inlet 64 is maximum (four times).

  In the process of S609, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the normal symbol per random symbol table 202c for high probability, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 10 (b)).

  In the process of S608, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607, Based on the symbol random number table 202c for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the symbol is hit normally is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 10 (b)).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is the hit of the normal symbol (S612), and if it is determined that the symbol is the normal symbol (S612: Yes) The display mode of the hit time is set (S613). In the process of S 613, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “o” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour and hour counter 203e is 1 or more (S614), and if the value of the hour and hour counter 203e is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the current is a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this embodiment, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible during the jackpot of the special symbol, even when the normal symbol is hit, it is the same as when the normal symbol is detached. The number of times of opening of the motorized part and the opening time thereof are set.

  In the process of S615, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol The opening period of the motorized accessory attached to 64 is set to one second, and the number of times of opening is set to two (S616), and the process proceeds to the processing of S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the open period of the motorized accessory accompanying the first ball inlet 64 is 0 The setting is made for 2 seconds, and the number of times of release is set to 1 (S617), and the processing shifts to the processing of S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is normally out (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour and hour counter 203e is 1 or more (S619), and if the value of the hour and hour counter 203e is 1 or more (S619: Yes), fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 The variation time of the display is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / hour counter 203e is 0 (S619: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing is ended. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, compared with the time of low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short with "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and further Since the release period of the first ball entrance 64 becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first ball entrance 64.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). In addition, before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device 83, the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621.

  In the process of S 622, when the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S 622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "o" symbol as the second symbol stops at the second symbol display device 83. It is set to be displayed (lit display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is out and the display mode is set by the processing of S 618, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit It is set to be displayed. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the second symbol display updating process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is performed next, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is changed. The process is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

  Then, when the variable display under execution in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation processing is a hit of the ordinary symbol Is determined (S624). If the lottery result this time is a normal symbol hit (S 624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electrically driven combination attached to the first ball entrance 64 is set (S 625), and this processing is ended. When the opening / closing control start of the motorized combination is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing control of the electrically operated combination is performed when the motorized combination opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the motorized part is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or S617 end. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S624 that the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). The through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67, and if the ball has passed, This is processing for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second ball entrance 67 (S701). Here, passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, if it is determined that the ball has passed through the second ball entry port 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is obtained . Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed the second entrance ball opening 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed the second entrance ball opening 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 If it is not less than (S703: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67 (S701: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is the first of the vacant hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 This process is ended by storing in the area of (S705). In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is made the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout and emission control device 111 in the same manner, and the power disconnection occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is set to ON (S904). If it is set to ON (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. Transition to On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not set to ON (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not generation information of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No), since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the processing shifts to S912 also in this case.

  If the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S912. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S912). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S913, S914), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not set to ON (S904: No), occurrence information of the power-off is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) For example (S907: Yes), while holding the backed up data in the RAM 203, the power-off occurrence information is cleared (S908). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery is transmitted to restore the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of the drive power supply cutoff (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  In the process of S910, the rendering permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Then, the interruption is permitted (S911), and the process shifts to the main processing described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic processing of 4 m second cycle, and the counter updating processing of S1010 and S1011 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, while the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 18) is being executed, output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 The external output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, it determines the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (refer to FIG. 18), and if there is the winning detection information, corresponds to the winning ball number to the payout control device 111. Send an award ball command. Further, the ball number command for holding balls set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 19) or the start winning process (see FIG. 21) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, if the special symbol is in the jackpot state, execution of the jackpot effect or variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether the specified winning opening 65a has a specified number of balls. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning hole 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, a motorized product opening and closing process is performed to control the opening and closing of the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 (S1005). In the electric part opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric part is set by the process of S625 in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 22), the opening / closing control of the electric part is started. In addition, the opening / closing control of the motorized prize is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 in the normal symbol variation process end.

  Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 20), the first symbol display is a variation display according to the variation pattern Start at device 37. In this embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses from when the fluctuation is started. Simultaneously turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED; if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED At the same time, turn on the red LED.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, each time the main processing is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Also, in the first symbol display update process, the first symbol display device when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 20) ends. The variation display being executed in 37 is ended, and the stop symbol (the first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 20). The stop display (lighting display) is performed on the device 37.

  Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update processing, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 22), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83 Do. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update processing, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (refer to FIG. 22), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83 In the display mode set by the processing of S613 or the processing of S618 in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 22), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 ((2) Turn on).

  After that, it is judged whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1009) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described S1001 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing of this time (S1009: No), the first main processing is performed until it reaches the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing (1) Update of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1010, S1011).

  First, update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1008, if the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 24 has been executed, so the processing at the time of the power-off after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1014), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1008 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S1001. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S1001. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

<Control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 27, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S1318 (see FIG. 28) is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called "temporary power failure"). It is determined whether or not it has been started during the execution of step S1202). As described later with reference to FIG. 28, when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1315 in FIG. 28), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S1318. Before the power-off process is performed, the power-off process flag is set to on, and after the power-off process is completed, the power-off process flag is set to off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1318 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1202: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S1318 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. From the above, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S1318 after a momentary power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When it is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1202: Yes), the current start-up process is performed after the instantaneous power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off process of S1318, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1204, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1206). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1208, it is determined whether the power-off flag is set to ON (S1208). The power-off flag is set to ON when the power-off process of S1318 is performed (see S1317 in FIG. 28). That is, since the power-off flag is set to ON before the power-off processing of S1318 is performed, the process of S1208 is performed in the state where the power-off flag is set to ON is the current start-up process. This is a case where the power failure process of S1318 is started after completion of the power failure process after the occurrence of a momentary power failure. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1209), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210). The permission is set (S1211), and the processing shifts to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S1208 in the state where the power-off flag is set to off is that, for example, the current startup processing is started after the power is completely shut off, via the processing of S1204 to S1206. This is the case when the processing of S1208 is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209 which is a clear process of the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1210, and an initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and interrupt permission is set. Then (S1211), the process proceeds to the main processing.

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1209 is that when the process of S1208 is reached via the processes of S1204 to S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1204. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current processing of S1301 has been executed (S1301), and 1 ms or more has elapsed If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the process of S1302 to S1310. In the process of S1301, the process of determining whether or not 1 ms has elapsed is mainly a process relating to display (rendering) in S1302 to S1310, and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S1312, the command determination process of S1311, and the process of updating the counter values of S1313 and S1314 in a short cycle. Since the process of S1311 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent reception omission of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1311 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Setting based on the above can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1311 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1302) ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to become the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power on notification process is executed (S1304). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1305 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect processing, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to the device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of lighting a hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring and rendering process is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S1307), the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set so as to perform an effect corresponding to. In this process, when an operation by the player of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the variable effect is not executed or during a high speed change period, processing for changing the stage is performed, and a rear surface image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when the advance notice character appears at the start of the variable display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during reach production produces a sense of expectation for the jackpot. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be set as a decision button for selecting one reach effect among a plurality of reach effects. When the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1307 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process shifts to the process of S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing of S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1311, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control apparatus 110 (S1311). Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, after the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S1312). In this variation display setting process (S1312), in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute variation presentation, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 . As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1312 is finished, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1313). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1315 (S1313: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1315), and the power-off process is executed (S1316). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1317), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the occurrence information of the power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1315 (S1313: No), it is judged based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1314) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1314: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1314: Yes), the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the command determination processing (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1311). This command determination process (S1311) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process (S1311), first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern is detected from the main control apparatus 110. It is determined whether a command has been received (S1401). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1402).

  After S1402 is executed, the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1403), and it is determined whether it is a kind of conversation advance notice variation pattern (S1405). When it is determined that it is the conversation advance notice variation pattern (S1404: Yes), a display conversation notice command is set (S1405). On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern is other than the speech advance variation pattern (S1404: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), it is next determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1406). When the stop type command is received (S1406: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1407), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1408). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a variable display setting process (see FIG. 30) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1406: No), it is next determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1409). And when the holding ball number command is received (S1409: Yes), the value contained in the received holding ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 (special symbol The number of times of suspension N of the variable display in is extracted, and this is stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1410). Further, in the processing of S1410, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S1410 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, since the number of holding balls command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the ball wins at the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) or when the drawing of the special symbol is performed, the starting winning combination is performed. Every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 by the processing of S1410 is the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110 It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc. At the time of lottery of symbols, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1410 is executed, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number-of-held-balls number design according to the number of held balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1409, when the ball holding ball number command has not been received (S1409: No), it is judged whether or not other commands have been received, and the process according to the received command is executed (S1419) ), Return to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed control The command is set to be sent to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the variable display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S1312). This variation display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform variation effects, The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1501). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (ie, off) (S1501: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so the process proceeds to S1506. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1501: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1502), and then the fluctuation pattern in the process of S1404 in the command determination process (see FIG. 29). The fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1503).

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1504). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  In the process of S1505, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1505). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S1505: No), since the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, this fluctuation display End the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1505: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1506), and then in the process of S1408 in the command determination process (see FIG. 29) The stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1507).

  In the process of S1508, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1508), and the process shifts to the process of S1509. Here, the display control device 114 is notified of the stop type corresponding to the correct stop type (complete loss, back and forth reach, big hit (big hit A, big hit B), etc.).

  In the process of S1509, it is determined whether or not the received fluctuation pattern command is a kind of speech advance fluctuation pattern (S1509). If it is determined that the received fluctuation pattern command is a fluctuation pattern other than the conversation advance notice fluctuation pattern (S1509: No), the display control device 114 is notified based on the stop type set in the process of S1508. A display stop type command for the display is generated and set to transmit the command to the display control apparatus 114 (S1511). The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1509 that the received change pattern command is a kind of conversation advance notice variation pattern (S1509: Yes), a display notice advance exclusive stop type command is set (S1512). The display conversation notice dedicated stop type command is a command for instructing the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 to set display of a symbol in the conversation notice.

  This display conversation notice dedicated stop type command is based on the contents of the display conversation notice command set in the processing of S1405 in the command determination processing (S1311 in FIG. 29, S1311) executed by the MPU 231 of the voice lamp control device 113. It is set. In detail, the contents of the conversational announcement are set respectively for the left symbol and the right symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 14, and are predetermined when the processing of S1405 is executed. (Determined by acquiring the value of the effect counter 223e) and the speech advance notice variation pattern. If the conversation advance notice variation pattern is a change pattern of conversation advance notice establishment, one of the things for which the conversation advance notice is established is determined by lottery, and if the conversation advance notice is a change pattern of not establishment, the conversation advance notice is not established. One of the following is determined by lottery. In the per-conversation notice variation pattern, all the notices of conversation are set to be established. Then, the display-use conversation notice dedicated stop type command corresponding to the left symbol and the right symbol of the set (selected) conversation notice is set.

<Control Process Executed by MPU 231 of Display Control Device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 43. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to the hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 are temporarily stored in the NAND flash memory 234a after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 states that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, data of one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read out from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after specifying the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM can be operated at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs as in the present embodiment. Since it is a memory that can read out data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 immediately enters the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S1601), and the display control device 114 is made to be able to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Launch

  Here, the boot process (S1601) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S1601) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine, and are stored in the third symbol display device 81. A character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is slow especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a as the MPU 231. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the above-mentioned MPU 231 and character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. The control program stored in the two program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S1701). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1702). Thus, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S1701.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S1702, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S1702, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. Among the control programs, the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1703). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored as data tables. It transfers to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after the other processing necessary for the boot processing is executed (S1704), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after this boot processing (see S1601 in FIG. 31) ends. The start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S1602 in FIG. 31) is set (S1705), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process is finished.

  As described above, when the boot process (S1601) is executed, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are released after the system reset is released from the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed to perform various controls. It is possible to maintain high processing performance, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition using the auxiliary effect part.

  On the other hand, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first are stored by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are NAND flash memory 234 a. Even in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 32, the control program of the predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1701 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, but not necessarily limited thereto, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1701 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S1702. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer The process set in 231 a may be executed. Then, the processes of S1703 to S1705 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S1701 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the top of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is S1701. And after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S1702, the processing of S1703 to S1705 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described where in the first program storage area 234d1 a part of the boot program to be executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored among the boot programs. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process starts, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1703 to S1705 without performing the processes of S1701 and S1702. As a result, since the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, the number of transfer processes of the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary rendering unit in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is finished, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1602). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs to execute display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a at power on of the resident video RAM 235 (S1603). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination When the power is turned on, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the main image from the character ROM 234 when the power for the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off. When transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1603, next, the fluctuation image at power on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1604). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller 237, according to the transfer instruction, transmits the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1604, the simple image display flag 233c is then performed. Is turned on (S1605). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 41A) described later. The resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed so as to transfer (see S3302 of FIG. 42A).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 of the resident video RAM 235 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. Thus, during the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B), the simplified command determination process is performed so that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) is drawn. The simple display setting process (see FIG. 33B and S2109) is executed (see FIG. 33B and S2108).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is third By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 also transfers the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol Since the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) to the first ball entrance 64, and the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110 When it is through the device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image can be displayed immediately during the variation presentation period, and a simple variation presentation can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Also, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, so it takes time to transfer the data, so that the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on becomes longer after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S1605, interrupt permission is set (S1606), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1606, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33A, the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 33 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2001), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 33 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interruption process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list (see FIG. 17) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 33B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2101: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so it is not a power-on image (not shown) but a normal effect image Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (S2102) is executed, and then the display setting process (S2103) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2102), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer data corresponding to the set display data table A table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the aspect and the type of stop of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped quickly, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 34 to 37.

  In the display setting process (S2103), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2102) or the like, an image of one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 Concretely identify the contents of Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40.

  After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S2104). In this task processing, based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 set in the display setting processing (S2103) or the simple display setting processing (S2109), the image is configured In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object), various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2105). In this transfer setting process (S2105), while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the transfer instruction to transfer. The details of the transfer setting process (S2105) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 42 to 43.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S2106). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S2104), and a transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2105) The drawing list shown in FIG. 15 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by processing of S2107, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol, for example. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2101 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simplified command determination process (S2108) is executed, and then the simplified display setting process (S2109) is executed to shift to the process of S2104.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 37, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2102) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 34, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2201), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2201: No), The command determination process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S2103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2202). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S2203).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2204), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2204: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed. Then (S2205), the process returns to the process of S2201.

  Here, the details of the fluctuation pattern command processing (S2205) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. The variation pattern command processing (S2205) is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing (S2205), first, a display data table corresponding to the variation presentation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The table buffer 233 d is set (S 2301).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2301, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is selected. It sets to the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is main controller 110 Receive the next display change pattern command from the main control unit 110 while displaying the fluctuation effect according to the set display data table on the third symbol display device 81 when instructed by the Since another variable display is suddenly started, there is a possibility that the player may feel discomfort.

  On the other hand, by setting the display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time to the display data table buffer 233 d as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time longer than the display data table actually set is Even when the variable effect having the symbol is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the change effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is finished, the next display pattern from the main controller 110 Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the command is received, the player can feel comfortable with the third symbol display device 81. You can keep watching the pattern fluctuation.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and it is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table set by the process of S2301 is turned on, and the other display data tables The data table determination flag corresponding to is set to off (S2303). In the display setting process, it is easily determined which fluctuation pattern the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d corresponds to by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S 2303. can do.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2304), and the pointer 233f Is initialized to 0 (S2305). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S2306).

  Thereafter, the variation pattern command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing. By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2305, from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2301, At the same time as the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, the transfer data table buffer 233e is extracted by the processing of S2302 while extracting the drawing contents defined at the address shown by the pointer 233f The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the image data of the sprite necessary in the set display data table is previously extracted from the character ROM 234 and the normal video RAM 23 Is transferred to the image storage area 236a as controls the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, it is determined that the fluctuation effect in the display data table is ended by counting the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the display data table using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2304. In this case, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2204 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2204: No), it is then determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2206), If there is a display variation type command (S2206: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S2207), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2207) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command process. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (large jack A, big jack B, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, reach out completely) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S2401), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time V interrupt processing (see FIG. 33B) is executed, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect is set (S2402).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is It is set to off (S2403).

  Here, as described above, in the display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation based on the data table, The offset information (pattern offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is described. In the above-described task processing (S2105), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2403 and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, but before drawing is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the normal video from the character ROM 234 is used. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, high drawing responsiveness in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained.

  It should be noted that, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, therefore, command determination processing is executed. In the case where two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, there is no possibility, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously displayed for display It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2401, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set by the process of S2402.

  Temporarily, if the stop symbol corresponding to "the big hit of the special symbol" is set, in fact, even if it is "the removal of the special symbol", the "special symbol" in the third symbol display device 81 The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, causing the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become the "big hit of the special symbol", which may lower the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, if the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set as in the present embodiment, in fact, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", stop of complete removal on the third symbol display device 81 Even if the symbol is displayed, the player can be pleased because the pachinko machine 10 is "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2206 that the display stop type command has not been received (S2206: No), it is determined whether the display conversation annunciation command has been received (S2208). If it is determined that the display conversation advance notice command is received, the display conversation advance notice processing is executed (S2209), and the process returns to the processing of S2201.

  Here, the display conversation annunciation process (S2209) will be described with reference to FIG. 36 (a). FIG. 36 (a) is a flow chart showing this display conversation annunciation process (S2209). In the display conversation annunciation process (FIG. 36A, S2209), a process of setting an announcement display mode regarding anticipation of conversation is executed.

  In the display conversation annunciation process (FIG. 36 (a), S2209), first, a conversation announcement data table corresponding to the display conversation announcement command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is selected (decided) from the conversation announcement selection table 234a3. Then, the display data table buffer 233d is set (S2501). The transfer data table corresponding to the set conversation notice data table is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502). The data table determination flag is set to ON (S2503), time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the set data table (S2504), the pointer 233f is initialized (S2505), and this processing is ended.

  Returning to FIG. 34, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2208 that the display conversation advance notice command has not been received (S2208: No), it is determined whether the display conversation advance notice only stop type command has been received from the voice lamp control device 113 (S2210). If it is determined that the display conversation advance notice only stop type command has been received (S2210: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2211 to execute the conversation advance notice only stop type command process (S2211).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 36 (b), the conversation announcement dedicated stop type command processing (S2211) will be described. FIG. 36 (b) is a flow chart showing processing for command for pause type for conversation announcement only. This conversation advance notice dedicated stop type command process (FIG. 36 (b), S2211) executes a process corresponding to the display conversation notice advance variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the conversation notice dedicated stop type command processing (FIG. 36 (b), S2211), first, the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front and back out of reach, reach out of back and forth out of reach) indicated by the display notice for voice dedicated only stop type command. Determine the stop type table for conversation notice only corresponding to any one completely removed (S2601), and after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 set by the stop type table dedicated to the call notice A stop symbol is finally set (S2602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is It is set to off (S2603).

  Here, as described above, in the display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation based on the data table, Offset information (pattern offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is described. In the above-described task processing (S2105), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2603 and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Returning to FIG. 34, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2210 that the display conversation advance notice dedicated stop type command has not been received (S2210: No), it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands ( S2212) If there is an error command (S2212: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2213), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2213) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing error command processing (S2213). The error command process (S2213) is to execute a process corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In error command processing (FIG. 37, S2213), first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S2701). Then, among error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S2702), and the error command is generated. The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2701, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S2702, and the error type is handled. The process is executed to display a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S2702, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2213 that there is no error command (S2213: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2219), and the process returns to S2201.

  In the process of S2201 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes ), Each process of S2202 to S2219 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2201 to S2219 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in the process of S2201 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

  In the simplified command determination process (S2109) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B), the same process as the command determination process is performed. However, in the simple command determination process, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image, ie, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command The variation pattern command process (see FIG. 35A) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 35B), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are extracted and the other commands are Perform processing to discard without executing the processing corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (refer to FIG. 35A) executed in this case, in the processing of S2301, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image upon power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image necessary for the setting are stored in the power-on main motion image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233b, and a process of clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40, details of the above-described display setting process (S2103) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 38, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (S3001: No), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed first, and the process of S3002 to S3004 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and the new command flag is set to off (S3002). The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing of

  In the process of S3003, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S3004).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 39, the details of the warning image setting process will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, with reference to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set Warning image data for displaying a warning image of an error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3101).

  In task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various required parameters.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3004), or when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, ie, off in the process of S3003 (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3005.

  In S3005, pointer update processing is executed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. In this pointer update process, transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233 f for specifying the address to be done.

  In this pointer update process (S 3005 in FIG. 40), first, 1 is added to the pointer 233 f (S 3201). That is, in principle, the pointer 233 f is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined at the address "0001H" and thereafter, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so each address Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233 f is updated by the process of S 3201, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233 f after the update is End information (S2802). As a result, if it is the End information (S3202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f is updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, beyond the address where the entity data is written.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3203). If it is a demonstration display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S3205), and this processing ends And return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2803 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S3206), this processing is ended, and it returns to display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, when the display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, the display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address of the immediately preceding address in which the End information is described Since the drawing content is always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the end information (S3202: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 38, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S3006 together with the warning image etc. expanded earlier, and the display coordinates for each sprite Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3007), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3008: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to finish the variation display and to perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the finalized display flag is on or not ( S3009).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S3009: Yes), the finalized display is not yet performed, and it is the timing to perform the finalized display, so first, the finalized display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S3010), and then the contents are cleared by writing the null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3011). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time in the finalized display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S3014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S3015) Return to the V interrupt processing.

  Thereby, when the display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233 d, etc., the final display effect of the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Can set the drawing contents. Further, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  In addition, the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fluctuation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect changes in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, and in the display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table starts The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is described until a predetermined time passes since it is done. In the task processing (S2104), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S3015, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, if the finalized display flag is not on but off in the process of S3009 (S3009: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S3016). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S3016: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less as the finalized display effect ends, so the demonstration display data table is displayed data table The contents are set in the buffer 233 d (S 3017), and then the null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233 e to clear the contents (S 3018). Then, time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration effect is being performed in the on state is set on (S3021), this processing is ended, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

  As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the finalized display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can set the drawing contents.

  In the process of S3016, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3017: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the completion of the definite display effect, which means that the demonstration effect is ended, so the display setting process is ended as it is And return to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process performed in the next V interruption process. The demonstration effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the simplified display setting process (S2109) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, an image of the power-on-time fluctuation image according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect based on the power-on time fluctuation image is finished. Is set to the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2105) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 41 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3302) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simplified image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the process of S3301, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234 It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41B, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 41 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not transfer instruction of untransferred image data is given to the image controller 237 (S3401), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes) Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer process of the image data performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction is completed (S3402). In this processing of S3402, after the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing is completed when the transfer completion signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S3402 (S3402: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to S3403. Also, as a result of the process of S3301, even when a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the process proceeds to S3403.

  In the process of S3403, it is determined whether all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S3403), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3403: No) A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

  As a result, transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing, and the image controller 237 transmits The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. In the transfer data information, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data for residence is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here) The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the process of S3403, if all resident target image data have been transferred (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B), not the simple command determination process and the simple display setting process, but the command determination process (see FIGS. 34 to 37) and the display setting process (FIGS. 38 to 40). Since reference is performed, drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the image at the normal time is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 42) (see S3301: No in FIG. 41A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all residency to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is used. The image drawing process can be performed in Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, image data for frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message in the resident video RAM 235, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made to reside immediately after the display is decided by the display etc., even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings The responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, a normal image transfer setting process (S3303) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

  In the normal image transfer setting process (S3303 in FIG. 42), first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer update process (S3005) of the display setting process (S2103) executed earlier is performed. The information described in the address indicated by the updated pointer 233 f is acquired (S 3501). Here, the information indicated by the transfer data table of the display data table and the pointer of the notice transfer data table of the notice data table is acquired respectively. Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S3502), and if it is transfer data information (S3502: Yes), character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of, and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM for normal use 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3503, the transfer start flag is set in the work RAM 233 to indicate that there is image data to be transferred in the on state, and the process proceeds to step S3505.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data in the process of S3502 (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3505. In the process of S3505, it is determined whether or not an image data transfer instruction is newly set to the image controller 237 after the last transfer of image data is completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If it is (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

  In the process of S3406, after setting the transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, if it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3506 (S3506: No), since the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to S3507. Also, as a result of the process of S3505, even when the image data transfer instruction is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3505: No), the process moves to S3507.

In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507). If the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), since there is image data to be transferred, the transfer start flag Turn off (S3508),
In the process of S3517, it is determined whether the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517). The determination in the process of S3517 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite as the transfer target is the normal video If it is determined that the stored state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3517 (S3517: Yes), the character ROM 234 does not need to transfer the image data to the normal video RAM 236 The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, so that the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3517 (S3517: No), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3418). As a result, transfer data information of transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, it is possible to transfer the image data of the transfer target image from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, transfer) The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3518, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3519), and the normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233i sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  Next, it is determined whether the rear image change flag is on (S3513). Then, if the back image change flag is not on but off (S3513: No), since there is no image data to be transferred, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3513: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so after setting the back image change flag to off (S3514), the back image provided for each back image type Among the determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3515). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3516), and the process proceeds to S3517.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S3515, if the back image determination flag in the on state is of the back A, the normal image transfer process is ended as it is.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to send the image controller 237 the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233 f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can.

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, whereby the predetermined is performed according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2106) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2105) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) The drawing list shown in FIG. 15 is generated from the color information, the filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105) (S3601). That is, in the process of S3601, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2105), the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored is specified for each sprite. Then, with respect to the specified storage RAM type and address, the necessary parameters for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites to be placed on the front side from the sprites to be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, and then details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as proper drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , The final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In the present embodiment, the notice display mode of the talk notice is set such that the display order is at the forefront. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 6 (b) to 6 (c) and 7 (a), the display mode of the speech advance notice is more on the front side than the symbols or other characters set in the display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Is displayed. Furthermore, the conversation notice effect displayed when the talk notice shown in FIG. 6 (c) and FIG. 7 (a) is established is to hide the variation of the symbol set in the display data table of the variation pattern. Displayed on the front side. In the meantime, a temporary third symbol (special symbol) showing that the special symbol (third symbol) is changing is shown by two “o” in the lower left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, By alternately turning on and off the "o", the player is notified of the change.

  In addition, in the display data table of the speech advance notice variation pattern, the third symbol is set to be variably displayed at a low speed or a high speed during this period, and when the speech advance notice is not displayed, the variation of the figure is displayed It is a structure.

  By configuring in this way, the conversation advance notice variation pattern can be used as a normal change pattern even when the conversation advance notice is not performed. Therefore, the number of fluctuation patterns can be reduced, and the amount of data of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, by setting the drawing data of the conversation notice to be set at the end of the drawing list, the conversation notice is displayed on the front side of the display content set in the variation pattern. Not limited to that, when drawing data of conversation announcement is set, the drawing data on the back side may not be set in the drawing list.

  Further, the drawing contents of the conversation notice in the present embodiment may also be set in advance in the display data table corresponding to the conversation notice variation pattern.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and drawing object buffer information specified by the drawing object buffer flag 233 j are transmitted to the image controller 237 (S 3502). Here, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 1 including the information for expanding the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236 b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing development of the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236 c as drawing object buffer information.

  The image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands it by overwriting in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and drawing of an image according to the drawing list is performed.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from the frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing object buffer information, and the image information together with the drive signal is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. Can.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3602, the drawing object buffer flag 233j is updated (S3603). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The update of the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is performed by inverting the value, that is, setting “1” when the value is “0”, and setting “0” when the value is “1”. To be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 33B) is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. The second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of a minute is read. Accordingly, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately specifying, it is possible to perform display processing of an image of one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing of an image of one frame.

  In the present embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is configured to select the conversation advance notice variation pattern, but the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 roughly determines the variation pattern (for example, determines only the number of seconds of variation) ), And based on the rough determination of the fluctuation pattern of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 by the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114, a detailed fluctuation pattern such as a speech advance notice fluctuation pattern is determined by lottery or the like. It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, the control load of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed to execute the conversation notice, but it is a temporary stop display which is slightly shaken, fluctuated and displayed and stopped and displayed to the player. It is stopped in the state that the symbol is not displayed yet. In the present embodiment, when the symbol is stopped and displayed without swinging and fluctuating, it is a case in which the symbol is displayed for a definite stop after a predetermined variation time has passed in the variation pattern.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol for which the conversation notice is executed is assumed to be stopped with different symbols (non-reach display mode) for the left symbol and the right symbol, but the present invention is not limited thereto. May be In this case, by establishing a conversation, it indicates an expectation to become a big win (a display mode that is likely to be displayed when a big win is made), or whether it will win a big deal by conversation announcement effect executed after the conversation is established. You may comprise so that the production | presentation which alert | reports may be performed.

<About Pachinko Machine 10 in the Second Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the case has been described in which the display mode of the speech advance notice is set based on the fact that the speech advance notice variation pattern is selected by the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment of the present invention, the stop symbol of the change of the previous special symbol (third symbol) is determined, and it is determined whether or not the conversation notice is executed at the start of the next change. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the determination is made. The same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

<About the notice of conversation in the second embodiment>
The outline of the speech advance notice in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45. FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b) are time charts showing fluctuations when the speech advance notice is established and when it is not established.

  FIG. 44 (a) is a time chart showing a case where conversation announcement is established and conversation announcement effect is executed. The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation 1 which has been previously fluctuation started is a fluctuation pattern in which the result of determination of acceptance is out and which is stopped at the stop symbol as shown in FIG. 45 (a). In the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation 1, through the symbol low speed fluctuation period: T where the third symbol is fluctuated and displayed at low speed by the third symbol display device 81, the symbol high speed fluctuation period where the third symbol is fluctuated and displayed at high speed: F After passing, again, after passing through the symbol low speed fluctuation period, as shown in FIG. 45 (a), after the three symbols temporarily stop in the symbol row Z1, the symbol temporary stop period (swing fluctuation period) After having passed), it is decided stop. Then, after being decided and stopped during the decision stop period (in the present embodiment, 1 second), the variation of the special symbol (third symbol) of the variation 2 corresponding to the next pending suspension is started. In this case, the stop symbol of the variation 1 is determined, it is determined whether it is possible to give a notice of conversation, and if it is a symbol capable of giving a notice of conversation, the variation pattern of the variation 2 establishes a conversation notice. It is determined whether or not it is a variation pattern (per-conversation advance notice variation pattern or variation pattern set to conversation advance notice establishment among out-of-call conversation advance variation patterns), and a conversation advance notice data table is set.

  Since variation 2 shown in FIG. 44 (a) is a variation pattern in which the speech notice is established, the speech notice shown in FIG. 45 (b) is displayed over the symbol low speed fluctuation period and the symbol high speed fluctuation period. The conversation notice effect shown in FIG. 6C and FIG. 7A is displayed across the subsequent symbol high-speed fluctuation period and the symbol low-speed fluctuation period.

  After that, it is informed that it becomes reach, and after the display mode of the super reach set in the display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation 2 is displayed, the symbol is temporarily stopped by the combination of the symbols showing the lottery result It is decided and stopped after passing through a symbol temporary stop period.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (b), in the speech advance notice in the second embodiment, when the fluctuation start timing of fluctuation 2 comes, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), the display area of the third symbol is reduced. It is formed in the display area 81s, and in the reduced display area 81s, as shown in FIG. 45 (d), the third symbol is reduced and scroll-displayed from top to bottom. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the third symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, since the size of the reduced display area 81s is sufficiently smaller than the display area where the speech advance notice is displayed (about 1/16 in the present embodiment), the display mode of the speech advance notice is disturbed. It can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the third symbol displayed in the reduced display area 81s is displayed with the enlargement ratio of the character in the normal state reduced by the display setting of the display data table, but the reduced symbol data May be set to be dedicated, and the symbol may be displayed. With this configuration, the control load for the reduction process can be reduced, and the control load of the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the third symbol displayed in the reduced display area 81s is scrolled from the top to the bottom as in the normal time, but it is not limited thereto and is different from the normal time such as right to left It may be configured to be displayed in such a manner that the scroll display or the symbol blinks (the brightness of the symbol is raised or lowered or the transparency of the symbol is varied), and the player is notified intelligibly. Further, by displaying the symbols in a flickering manner without scrolling them, it is possible to easily inform that the symbols are changing even in a small display area.

  FIG. 44 (b) is a time chart showing a change when the speech advance notice is not established. The variation 1 is the same as the variation 1 shown in FIG. The time chart shown in FIG. 44 (b) determines the stop symbol of the change 1 at the start of the change of the change 2 and determines the change pattern of the change 2 if it is a stop symbol that can be used to perform conversation announcement. It is a time chart when it is judged that it is a change pattern in which a notice is not established. In this case, after the conversation notice shown in FIG. 45C is displayed in the symbol low-speed fluctuation period, the display mode in which the third symbol is variably displayed at high speed set in the display data table of the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation 2 Is displayed. Thereafter, after the temporary stop display is performed with the combination of the symbols indicating the lottery result, the symbol temporary stop period is passed, and the final stop is performed.

  By configuring in this way, even if the player is the combination of the stop notice being given a conversation notice, the conversation notice will be executed and the jackpot will be a jackpot in the next change, even if it is a change in the out-of-place lottery result. You can play games expecting it. Therefore, the player can have an expectation that it will be a stop symbol capable of giving a notice of conversation, and even if the lottery result is a fluctuation of out-of-order, it is possible to enjoy the game with the expectation of the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Display Control Device 114 in Second Embodiment
FIG. 46 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the second embodiment. A stop symbol history flag 233 m is added to the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 in the second embodiment with respect to the first embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The stop symbol history flag 233 m is a flag indicating that a stop symbol capable of executing conversation announcement has been displayed in a front change. In addition, the front fluctuation shows the fluctuation of the special symbol one before the fluctuation which becomes the fluctuation start.

  The stop symbol history flag 233 m can be used to give a notice of the combination of the third symbol displayed to be stopped in the processing of the stop type command processing 2 (FIG. 49 (a), S2215) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. In the case where it is determined that this is the case, it is set to ON in the processing of S2411. On the other hand, in the process of S2223 of the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, the process is set to off. In the initial setting executed when the power is turned on, the stop symbol history flag 233 m is a flag set to OFF.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Controller 113 in Second Embodiment>
In the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, the processing of the fluctuation display setting processing (S1312) of the main processing (see FIG. 28) is the fluctuation display setting processing 2 with respect to the first embodiment. The processing has been changed to (FIG. 47, S1320). Regarding the other processing, the same processing as the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment is executed.

  With reference to FIG. 47, the variable display setting process 2 (S1320) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process 2 (S1320). The variable display setting process 2 (S1320) is different from the variable display setting process (FIG. 30, S1312) in the first embodiment in that each process up to S1509 and S1512 is deleted, and each process from S1701 to S1713 is The same processing as each processing of S1501 to S1508 and S1511 of the variable display setting processing (S1312) in one embodiment is executed.

Regarding Control Processing Executed by Display Control Device 114 in Second Embodiment
In the control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second embodiment, V interrupt processing is performed on the control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment (FIG. 33B). The command determination process (FIG. 34, S2102) which is one of the processes is changed to the command determination process 2 (FIG. 48, S2110). The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  The command determination process 2 (S2110) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 2 (S2110). In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 48, S2110) in the second embodiment, each process of S2220 to S2222 is added to the command determination process (FIG. 34, S2102) in the first embodiment, and the process of S2207 Is changed to the process of S2215, and the processes of S2208 to S2211 are deleted. The other processes are the same as in the first embodiment.

  In the process of S2204 of the command determination process 2 (FIG. 48, S2110), when it is determined by the voice lamp control device 113 whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S2204: Yes), the stop symbol history flag 233 m is on. It is determined whether there is any (S2220). That is, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the front variation is a stop symbol that can be used to predict a conversation. In the present embodiment, the stop symbol capable of giving notice of conversation is set to a stop symbol other than the reach symbol in which the left symbol and the right symbol are the same symbol. In addition, you may set not only it but only a specific stop symbol (for example, a turtle in the left symbol, a shark in the right symbol, etc.) as a symbol which can give notice of conversation notice, or if it is a symbol other than reach symbol In the case where the lottery is executed and it is a win (when the counter is obtained and the value is a predetermined value), it may be configured to determine the conversation announcement as an executable symbol.

  In the process of S2220, when it is determined that the stop symbol history flag 233m is on (S2220: Yes), the variation pattern indicated by the currently received display variation pattern command is a variation pattern in which conversation announcement can be established. Is determined (S2221). Here, the fluctuation patterns in which the speech advance notice can be established are the out-of-order speech advance fluctuation patterns set when the speech advance notice fluctuation pattern and the speech advance notice are established. The off-the-speech anticipation fluctuation pattern set when the speech annunciation is established is set to the fluctuation pattern that always becomes the reach. As a result, even if the lottery result is out, it is possible for the player to always show the variation mode of the reach by establishing the conversation notice, and the player can have a feeling of expectation for the jackpot.

  When it is determined that the speech advance notice is a changeable pattern (S2221: Yes), the display speech advance notice process is executed (S2209). Note that this display conversation annunciation process (FIG. 36 (a), S2209) is almost the same process as that already described in the first embodiment, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted, but the previous stop symbol Correspondence is set, and the setting of the conversation notice for which the conversation notice is established is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2221 that the variation pattern is other than the variation pattern in which the conversation announcement can be established (S2221: No), the conversation dummy announcement process for display is executed (S2222).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 49 (b), the display conversation dummy annunciation process (S2222) will be described. FIG. 49 (b) is a flow chart showing this display conversation dummy annunciation process (S2222). In this display conversation dummy annunciation process (S2222), processing is performed in which display mode data is set in which the contents of the conversation announcement are not established by the conversation announcement of the symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the front variation.

  In the conversation dummy annunciation process for display (S2222), first, a conversation dummy annunciation data table corresponding to the stop symbol of the front change is set (S2311). The conversation dummy announcement data table has the same configuration as the conversation announcement data table of the first embodiment, and as shown in FIG. 45 (c), the conversation announcement is not established.

  The transfer data table corresponding to the conversation dummy notice data table set in the process of S2311 is determined (selected) and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2312). Then, the data table determination flag corresponding to the conversation dummy notice data table set by the process of S2311 is turned on, and the data table determination flag corresponding to the other conversation dummy notice data tables is set to OFF (S2313). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2313, it is easy to determine which notice content the conversation dummy notice data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. It can be judged.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time corresponding to the conversation dummy notice data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2311, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2314), and the pointer 233f is It is initialized to 0 (S2315). Thereafter, the display conversation dummy advance notice process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Referring back to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. After the processing of S2209 and S2222 is executed, or when it is determined in the processing of S2220 that the stop symbol history flag 233m is off (S2220: No), the processing of S2223 is executed.

  In the process of S2223, the stop symbol history flag 233m is set to off (S2223). Thereafter, fluctuation pattern command processing is executed (S2205). Since this variation pattern command processing (FIG. 35A, S2205) is the same processing as the processing already described in the first embodiment, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. After the process of S2205 is performed, the process of S2201 is performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2204 that the display variation pattern command has not been received (S2204: No), it is determined whether the display stop type command has been received from the audio lamp control device 113 (S2204) S2206). If it is determined that the display stop type command is received (S2206: Yes), stop type command processing 2 is executed (S2215).

  Here, the stop type command processing 2 (S2215) will be described with reference to FIG. 49 (a). FIG. 49 (a) is a flowchart showing the stop type command process 2 (S2215). The stop type command process 2 (S2215) executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 in the second embodiment is the process from the step S2410 to S2411 with respect to the stop type command process (FIGS. 35B and S2207) in the first embodiment. Each processing of has been added. In the processes of S2401 to S2403, the same processes as the stop type command process (FIGS. 35B and S2207) of the first embodiment are executed.

  After the process of S2402 is performed, the process of S2410 is performed. In the process of S2410, it is determined whether or not the combination of the stop symbols stop displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a combination that can be used to give a notice of conversation (S2410). If it is determined that the combination is possible to announce a conversation (S2410: Yes), the stop symbol history flag 233m is set to ON (S2411). On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop symbol is a combination that can not be notified of conversation (S2410), the processing of S2403 is executed.

  As described above, when the symbol is displayed in a stopped state, it is possible to easily determine whether or not to perform the conversation notification in the next change by determining whether the stopped symbol is a stopped symbol capable of notifying a conversation notice. .

  As described above, in the second embodiment, since the conversation announcement is performed using the stop symbol of the front variation, even if the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination indicating that the lottery result is out. , It can be made to expect the player that conversation announcement will be performed. In addition, when the contents of the speech advance notice are established, since the expectation to the jackpot can be held, the player can expect the contents of the speech advance notice to be established and become the jackpot across the two variations. it can.

<About Pachinko Machine 10 in the Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects the conversation advance notice variation pattern, the case of executing the conversation advance notice has been described. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is different in that at the start of a change, the next change is prefetched and, if it is a conversation advance notice variation pattern, the setting of the conversation notice is executed. The same elements as those of the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Controller 113 in Third Embodiment>
The main processing (FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the main process (see FIG. 51) in the third embodiment, the command determination process (FIG. 29, S1311) is replaced with the command determination process 2 (FIG. 52, S1420) as compared to the main process (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment. The variable display setting process (FIG. 30, S1312) is changed to the variable display setting process 3 (S1330). The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  The command determination process 2 (S1420) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 2 (S1420). The processing of S1421 to S1423, S1425 to S1430, and S1433 of command determination processing 2 (S1420) in the second embodiment is the processing of S1401 to S1403, S1405 to S1410, of command determination processing (FIG. 29, S1311) in the first embodiment. The same process as each process of S1419 is performed. Further, in command determination process 2 (FIG. 52, S1420) in the second embodiment, each process of S1423 to S1424 and S1431 to S1432 is added to the command determination process (FIG. 29, S1311) in the first embodiment. ing.

  After the process of S1423 is performed, the process of S1424 is performed. In the process of S1424, the lottery result of the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received this time is out, and the fluctuation to be started next (the fluctuation with respect to the lottery stored in the reserved first area) It is determined whether it is the advance variation pattern (S1424). Here, the determination of the type of the variation pattern of the variation to be started next variation is determined based on the information stored in the prize information storage area 223a based on the prize information command output from the main control device 110 .

  In the process of S1424, if it is determined that the current fluctuation is out and the fluctuation pattern of the next fluctuation is the speech advance fluctuation pattern (S1424: Yes), the display conversation annunciation command is set (S1425) .

  As the display conversation notice command set here, if the next change conversation notice variation pattern is a change pattern of conversation notice establishment, a command indicating that it is a conversation notice showing establishment of conversation notice is set. It is to be noted that, by setting the display conversation notice command indicating the establishment of the talk notice, the notice display as shown in FIG. 45 (b) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, if the next variation conversation advance notice variation pattern is a conversation advance notice variation pattern in which the conversation advance notice is not established, a display conversation advance notice command indicating that the conversation advance notice is not established is set. By setting the conversation notice command for display indicating that the conversation notice is not established, a notice display as shown in FIG. 45C is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 45 (b) and 45 (c) are displayed as fluctuation 2 in the second embodiment, but in the third embodiment, they are shown in FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b). Thus, the display is displayed from the temporary suspension of change 1 to the start of the change of the next change.

  Unlike the first embodiment, the conversation advance notice is displayed only for the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 45 (b) and 45 (c). The conversation notice effect (refer to FIG. 6 (c) and FIG. 7 (a)) displayed when the conversation notice is established is from the symbol low-speed variation period of variation 2 to the symbol high-speed variation period as shown in FIG. It is displayed by setting the conversation notice command for display which shows execution of a talk advance presentation production at the time of the change start of change 2 by the period until a symbol low speed change period ends through. In the third embodiment, in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, data tables of conversation announcements and conversation announcement effects are separately set as conversation announcement data tables.

  Although the present embodiment is configured to set the conversation annunciation for each of the variation 1 and the variation 2, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the conversation annunciation data table is similar to that of the first embodiment. As a configuration to be displayed by setting one conversation advance notice data table, in the advance notice display when the conversation advance notice is established, in the period from the temporary suspension of change 1 to the end of the symbol low speed change period of change 2 It may be configured to be displayed across the screen. With this configuration, the process of setting the conversation advance notice data table can be simplified.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1429 that the ball holding ball number command has not been received (S1429: No), it is determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1431). If it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S1431: Yes), information indicated by the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a corresponding to the holding ball (S1432). The winning information command output from main controller 110 is configured such that the type of fluctuation pattern selected at the start of fluctuation can be determined as a result of the pass / fail judgment.

  In the present embodiment, the winning information command is configured to allow discrimination of the type of fluctuation pattern to be selected at the start of fluctuation as a result of the success or failure determination, but the present invention is not limited thereto. It may be configured to be able to distinguish partial information of the fluctuation pattern type such as whether or not. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to simplify the prize information command. Therefore, the control load required for the command determination process can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the variable display setting process 3 (S1330) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process 3 (S1330). The variable display setting process 3 (FIG. 53, S1330) in the third embodiment is different from the variable display setting process (FIG. 30, S1312) in the first embodiment in each process of S1509 to S1512 from S1513 to S1515. Each process has been changed. The other processes are the same as in the first embodiment.

  After the process of S1508 is performed, the process of S1513 is performed. In the process of S1513, in S1425 of the command determination process 2 (FIG. 52, S1420), it is determined whether the display conversation annunciation command has been set (S1513). If it is determined that the display conversation advance notice command is not set (S1513: No), a display stop type command is set (S1514). On the other hand, if it is determined that the display conversation advance notice command is set (S1513: Yes), the display conversation advance notice dedicated stop type command is set (S1515).

  Thus, in the variable display setting process 3 (FIG. 53, S1330) in the third embodiment, when the display conversation notice command is set, the stop notice is set by setting the display talk notice dedicated stop type command. It can be adjusted to the displayed conversation notice command. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the content of the conversational announcement and the stop symbol do not match.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, fluctuation pattern command processing 2 (S2220) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process 2 (S2220). In the variation pattern command processing 2 (FIG. 54, S2220) in the third embodiment, the processing of S2310 and S2311 is added to the variation pattern command processing (FIG. 35, S2205) in the first embodiment. The other processes are the same as in the first embodiment.

  After the process of S2306 is performed, the process of S2310 is performed. In the process of S2310, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern whose fluctuation is to start is the conversation advance notice variation pattern which is set when the conversation notice is established (S2310). When it is determined that the conversation notice is set to be established as the conversation notice change pattern (S 2310: Yes), the conversation notice data table of the conversation notice effect corresponding to the conversation notice displayed in the previous change is displayed data The table buffer 233d is set (S2311). In the present embodiment, although omitted, processing such as setting of the rolling data table corresponding to the set conversation advance notice data table and initialization of the pointer is executed as in the processing from S2302 to S2305. Be done.

  By configuring in this way, as shown in FIG. 50 (a), the conversation advance notice data table corresponding to this conversation advance notice effect is set at the start of the change of change 2, and the symbol low speed change period from the start of change. In the period until the end of the conversation announcement effect is displayed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the notice of conversation by the symbol displayed at the time of the stop of the fluctuation, even if the fluctuation 1 of the previous change is the change of the lottery result, and the contents of the notice of the conversation are established. If there is, it can be enjoyed in expectation of conversation notice effects and whether reach will not be established in the next change. Therefore, the player can be entertained across a plurality of changes, and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game early.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the speech advance notice effect displayed when the speech advance notice is established is displayed from the start of fluctuation to the end of the symbol low speed fluctuation period, as shown in FIG. 45 (a). Since it is set, when reach is established, it is possible to show the player a reach effect after notifying that it will be the reach by the conversation advance notice effect. Further, when the reach is not reached, it is possible to temporarily stop the change and inform the player that the lottery result is out.

<About Pachinko Machine 10 in the Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 to 61, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects the conversation advance notice variation pattern, the case of performing the conversation advance notice has been described. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, at the start of the change of the special symbol, the change pattern for the next change is read ahead and determined, and if it is the super reach, the notice display of the conversation notice is executed. It differs from the first embodiment. The third embodiment is different from the third embodiment in that the fourth embodiment does not have a conversation advance notice variation pattern. The same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a time chart in the case where the conversation annunciation in the fourth embodiment is executed. With the time chart of the speech advance notice in the third embodiment, the speech advance notice effect executed when the speech advance notice is established is executed only for a predetermined period from the start of fluctuation of fluctuation 2 to the end of the symbol low speed fluctuation period. Differ in that That is, in the third embodiment, since the conversation advance notice variation pattern is exclusively set as the conversation advance notice variation pattern, the period from the start of variation to the end of the symbol low-speed change period in advance is made In contrast to being set, in the fourth embodiment, since it is a normal super reach fluctuation pattern, the period from the start of fluctuation to the end of the symbol low speed fluctuation period is different depending on the fluctuation pattern. . Therefore, after all the conversation advance notice effects are displayed, if it is a period during which the symbol fluctuates (before reaching the reach state), a display mode that becomes reach after normal fluctuation is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the display time of the speech advance presentation effect is not configured to match the period from the start of fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern of super reach to the end of the symbol low speed fluctuation period, but the present invention is not limited thereto. A plurality of conversation notice effects different in display time may be set, and the conversation notice effect may be selected according to the selected super reach display mode.

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Audio Lamp Controller 113 in Fourth Embodiment
FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment. In the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, a conversation advance presentation counter 223 f is added to the RAM 223 in the first embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment.

  The speech advance presentation counter 223f is a counter that indicates how many times the special symbol has started changing since the speech announcement was set. The initial value at power-on etc. is set to 0, and this conversation announcement effect counter 223f is set to 1 in the process of S1446 of the command determination process 3 (FIG. 58, S1440), and then the fluctuation display setting process 4 (FIG. One is added in the process of S1521 of 59, S1340). On the other hand, in the process of S1524, it is reset to 0 which is an initial value.

Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Controller 113 in Fourth Embodiment
The main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In the main processing (see FIG. 57) in the fourth embodiment, the command determination processing (FIG. 29, S1311) is different from the main processing (FIG. 29, S1311) in the first embodiment (FIG. 58, S1440). , The variable display setting process (FIG. 30, S1312) is changed to the variable display setting process 4 (FIG. 59, S1340). The other processes are the same as in the first embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the command determination processing 3 (S1440) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 3 (S1440). The processing of S1441 to S1443, S1447 to S1451 and S1454 of command determination processing 3 (FIG. 58, S1440) in the fourth embodiment is the processing of S1401 to S1403 and S1406 of the command determination processing (FIG. 29, S1311) in the first embodiment. ~ S1410, processing similar to S1419 is executed. The processing of S1452 to S1453 of command determination processing 3 (FIG. 58, S1440) of the fourth embodiment is the same processing as S1431 to S1432 of command determination processing 2 (FIG. 52, S1420) of the third embodiment. Therefore, the detailed description is omitted.

  After the process of S1443 of the command determination process 3 (FIG. 58, S1440) in the fourth embodiment is performed, the process of S1444 is performed. In the process of S1444, it is determined whether the lottery result of the current fluctuation pattern being received is out, and the type of the fluctuation pattern of the next fluctuation is the super reach (S1444). If it is determined that the lottery result of the variation pattern this time is out and the variation pattern of the next variation is the super reach (S1444: Yes), a display conversation notice command is set (S1445). The value of the conversation advance presentation effect counter 223f is set to 1 (S1446). On the other hand, if it is determined that the present fluctuation pattern is the hitting or next fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern other than the super reach (S1444: No), this process is ended.

  As described above, when it is determined from the information stored in the prize information storage area 223a that the change of the super reach is next started, if the lottery result of the change that is changed this time is out, the display of the conversation notice is displayed. Is displayed at the time of temporary suspension of change 1 as shown in FIG. Note that as the conversation notice displayed here, a conversation notice of only a conversation is displayed as shown in FIG. 45 (b). Therefore, the player can determine early that the change in super reach will be started next when the conversation announcement is performed. Therefore, it is possible to play a game expecting whether or not a conversation notice will be executed, even if it is a variable display of a lottery result of a disconnection.

  In the present embodiment, it is not necessary to set a variation pattern dedicated to conversation announcement by giving a conversation notice on condition that the next variation is a super reach, and the number of variation patterns can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the present variation is not performed, and if the variation pattern of the next variation is the super reach, the conversation announcement is performed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. If the variation pattern is a super reach, a lottery of a predetermined lottery probability may be executed, and if the lottery result is a hit, it may be set to execute conversation announcement. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the conversation announcement is performed, and to prevent the player from getting bored with the conversation announcement early.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the content of the conversation announcement is established, and all the speech announcement effects are configured to be reach, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the following fluctuation is the same as in the first to third embodiments. It may be configured to display a notice display (refer to FIG. 45C) in which a talk notice is not established in such a case, even if it is executed even with out-of-reach variation patterns that do not become reach.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the variable display setting process 4 (S1340) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process 4 (S1340). In the variable display setting process 4 (FIG. 59, S1340) in the fourth embodiment, each process from S1520 to S1524 is added to the variable display setting process (FIG. 30, S1312) in the first embodiment. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  After S1511 or S1512, the process of S1520 is performed. In the process of S1520, it is determined whether or not the value of the conversation advance announcement counter 223f is 1 (S1520). Since the conversation advance presentation counter 223f is set to 1 when the display conversation announcement command is set in the process of S1446 of the command determination process 3 (FIG. 58, S1440), the conversation advance presentation counter 223f is 1 Indicates that the display conversation annunciation command has been set.

  If it is determined that the conversation announcement counter 223f is 1 (S1520: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the conversation announcement effect counter 223f. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the conversation advance presentation effect counter 223f is not 1 (S1520: No), it is determined whether the value of the conversation advance presentation effect counter 223f is 2 (S1522). If it is determined that the value of the conversation advance presentation effect counter 223f is 2 (S1522: Yes), a conversation advance presentation effect command for display is set (S1523). Thereafter, the value of the conversation advance presentation effect counter 223f is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1524). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the conversation annunciation counter 223f is not 2 (S1522: No), this process is ended.

  As described above, if the conversation announcement effect counter 223f is 2, it indicates that the display conversation announcement command is the next variation of the set variation, so as shown in FIG. A display conversation notice effect command for displaying a talk notice effect is set. Therefore, it is possible to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display the conversation notice effect (see FIG. 6C and FIG. 7A) corresponding to the conversation notice at the timing of the start of fluctuation.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a command determination process 3 (S2120) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 3 (S2120). Command determination process 3 (FIG. 60, S2120) in the fourth embodiment is different from the command determination process (FIG. 34, S2102) in the first embodiment in fluctuation pattern command processing (FIG. 35A, S2205). The process is changed to pattern command process 2 (FIG. 54, S2220), and processes of S2240 and S2241 are respectively added. The fluctuation pattern command process 2 (FIG. 54, S2220) is the same process as the process described in the third embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When it is determined in the process of S2210 of the command determination process 3 (FIG. 60, S2120) in the fourth embodiment that the display conversation advance notice dedicated stop type command is not received (S2210: No), the process of S2240 Is executed. In the process of S2240, it is determined whether or not a display conversation advance presentation effect command has been received from the audio lamp control device 113 (S2240). If it is determined that the display conversation advance presentation effect command has been received (S2240: Yes), conversation advance presentation processing is executed (S2241).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 61, the conversation advance presentation effect processing (S2241) will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this conversation advance presentation effect processing (S2241).

  In the conversation preview effect processing (FIG. 61, S2241), first, a conversation preview effect data table corresponding to the stop symbol of the front variation is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2801). The conversation advance notice data table is the same as the conversation advance notice data table in the first embodiment except that only the conversation advance notice effect is extracted and set. In the third embodiment, the conversation advance notice data table is configured to be individually set for the conversation advance notice and the conversation advance notice effect, but the conversation advance notice data table for the conversation advance notice effect of the third embodiment and the fourth notice The conversation advance presentation effect data table in the embodiment has the same configuration. The conversation advance notice data table in the fourth embodiment is a data table in which display data of only a conversation advance notice is set as shown in FIG. 45 (b).

  The transfer data table corresponding to the conversation advance presentation effect data table set in the process of S2801 is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2802). The data table determination flag is set to ON (S2803), time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the set data table (S2804), the pointer 233f is initialized (S2805), and this processing is ended.

  By adopting the configuration as in the fourth embodiment, it is possible to execute conversation announcement without setting in advance the conversation announcement variation pattern dedicated to conversation announcement. Therefore, the number of fluctuation patterns can be reduced.

  In addition, even if the lottery result is out of variation, it can be expected that the speech advance notice will be executed. Therefore, even if the lottery result is out, the player can be entertained, and the trouble that the player gets bored with the game early can be suppressed.

  In the second to fourth embodiments, the stop symbol on which the conversation notice is executed is described as being the display mode (reach display mode) in which the left symbol and the right symbol are different, but the present invention is not limited thereto. It may be a display mode of the stop symbol of the reach-out when it comes off in a mode, and may be a display mode which shows the jackpot after a jackpot. In such a case, for example, in the speech notice of the reach out, since it is the same pattern, a special talk content is displayed like a brother's talk, or the probability that the fluctuation is the reach is other than that in other cases. It may be set to be high (in the case of reach, it is easy to be notified of a conversation with a stop symbol of reach out). By doing this, it is possible to expect the execution of the conversation notice regardless of which stop pattern the player is. In addition, when the speech notice is executed from the jackpot symbol after the jackpot, by configuring so that it is easy to be executed when the variation is the jackpot, the conversation notice is executed in the first change after the jackpot, continuously the jackpot The player can greatly expect to become, and can enjoy the game even after a big hit.

<About Pachinko Machine 10 in the Fifth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 62 to 67, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects the conversation advance notice variation pattern, the case of performing the conversation advance notice has been described. On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, when conversational annunciation is executed, balls of different colors are displayed, one of them is selected by lottery, and moved toward the speech anticipation comment window. The contact is different in that the background of the comment window changes to the color of the sphere. The same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

<About the feature of the notice of conversation in the fifth embodiment>
FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (b) show the speech notice in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 62 (a), when the speech advance notice is displayed, four different colors of sphere Q1 to sphere Q4 are displayed. Specifically, the sphere Q1 is a blue sphere, the sphere Q2 is a yellow sphere, the sphere Q3 is a green sphere, and the sphere Q4 is a red sphere. At the same time when the comment is displayed from the left symbol (the symbol of the turtle in FIG. 62 (a)), an effect display in which the sphere Q1 is moved is displayed in the comment window displaying the comment. As shown in 62 (b), the color of the comment window is changed to blue, which is the same as the color of the sphere Q1.

  It should be noted that which of the balls Q1 to Q4 is moved toward the comment window is determined by lottery based on the selected fluctuation pattern. The probability of being selected when the red ball Q4 has the most variation pattern lottery result is set high, and then the green ball Q3, the yellow ball Q2 and the blue ball Q1 are judged in order of yes or no The probability of being selected when the result is a big hit is set high.

  With this configuration, the red ball Q1 is selected, and the comment window changes to red, so that the player can have an expectation of becoming a jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, the four spheres are displayed each time, but some of them may be displayed by lottery or the like. For example, a plurality of blue spheres Q1 may be displayed. The display may be displayed (for example, four), or three blue spheres Q1 may be displayed, and the variation may be different so as to display one red sphere Q4. By configuring in this way, it is possible to expect that the red sphere Q4 does not move if the red sphere Q4 or the like with a high degree of expectation to the jackpot is included. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing a game which ball is displayed.

  FIG. 63A is a view schematically showing the display effect selection table 1 which is one type of the display effect selection table 234a5 set in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display effect selection table 1 is a selection table for determining the effect color (selected color) of one of the sphere Q1 to the sphere Q4 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of conversation announcement, which moves to the comment window. is there. As shown in FIG. 63 (a), a display effect counter for each effect color corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (here, the fluctuation pattern is schematically displayed as Nos. 1 to 7 for easy expression) 233k is allocated. Although details will be described later, the effect color selected in the display effect selection table 1 is temporarily stored in the area 0 (not shown) of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114. In the work RAM 233, areas 0 to 3 (not shown) are set in advance as storage areas for determining effect colors of the balls Q1 to Q4. The details of how to determine the effect color of each of the balls Q1 to Q4 will be described later.

  In addition, No. 1 of display effect selection table 234a5. 1 to No. The speech advance notice variation pattern shown in No. 4 is an out-of-order notice notice variation pattern in which the lottery result is deviated. 6 to No. A reference numeral 7 is a per-conversation notice variation pattern in which the lottery result is a hit. For example, no. When 4 is selected, and the value of the display effect counter 233k is 30, the yellow ball Q2 is selected.

  FIG. 63 (b) is a view schematically showing the display effect selection table 2 which is one type of the display effect selection table 234 a 5 set in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114. In the effect selection table 2 for display, a combination pattern of three effect colors other than the effect color determined in the effect selection table 1 for display (see FIG. 63A) among the four effect colors of sphere Q1 to sphere Q4. Is a selection table for determining

  As shown in FIG. 63 (b), a combination of effect colors is set, and the value of the display effect counter 233k is allocated to each pattern for each variation pattern. For example, the selected variation pattern is No. If it is one fluctuation pattern (outlier conversation advance notice fluctuation pattern) and the value of the display effect counter 233k is 70, the pattern 2 (blue: yellow: green) is selected. When the pattern 2 is selected, data indicating effect color of blue, yellow in the area 2 and green in the area 3 is stored in the area 1 of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114. Although the details will be described later, in the processing of S2515 of the display conversation annunciation processing 2 (S2250, FIG. 67) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, areas 0 to 3 are respectively spheres Q1 to Q4. A process of determining whether to correspond is performed. In the case of pattern 2, data indicating blue in area 1, yellow in area 2 and green in area 3 is set. Similarly, the patterns 3 to 5 are respectively set in the areas 1 to 3 in order from the left color shown in the display effect selection table 2 (FIG. 63B).

  Thus, by configuring, even if effect colors of the same combination are selected in areas 0 to 3, the positions of the effect colors displayed on the sphere Q1 to the sphere Q4 can be set to be different, Among the balls Q1 to Q4, the same ball moves to the comment window every time, and it is possible to suppress a defect that the moving ball is determined before the ball moves to the player. Further, the combination of the positions of the effect colors to be displayed on the balls Q1 to Q4 can be made random, and the player can be made to have a fresh taste. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

<About the conversation notice data table in the fifth embodiment>
FIG. 64 is a data table for displaying conversation notices, conversation notice effects, and notice effects of balls Q1 to Q4 by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment. The difference with the conversation advance notice data table of the first embodiment is that, in the conversation advance notice data table in the fifth embodiment, display data (ball display information) for displaying advance notice effects of the sphere Q1 to sphere Q4 and the sphere Q1. The points are different in that display data of an effect for changing the background color of the comment window is set by one of the balls Q4 being selected and moved.

  In addition, it selects from the above-mentioned effect selection table 1 for display (refer 63 (a)) and the effect selection table 2 for display (refer FIG. 63 (b)), and the information of each effect color of sphere Q1-sphere Q4 Information of the selected color determined by the display effect selection table 1 (FIG. 63 (a)) is set as sphere display information (with movement) and a selected color of the background of the comment window.

  In the example of the conversation advance notice data table of FIG. 64, at address 0032H, data such as symbol data of the sphere Q1 to sphere Q4 and display position, magnification, and respective effect colors are set as sphere advance notice. At address 0064H, in addition to the sphere display information similar to the address 0032H, the comment of the conversation notice is set with the comment content (display character information), the display position information (X, Y), and the color information of the background color of the comment window. . The display color usually indicated is white. At the address 0096H, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), display information after the set sphere has moved among the sphere Q1 to the sphere Q4 is set as sphere display information. The movement of the ball is set so that the moved display is obtained by setting information in which the ball has moved to the comment window little by little to the address of 0096H. In addition, display data of the background color of the comment window is set as the selected color (effect color selected in the display effect selection table 1 (see FIG. 64A)).

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Display Control Device 114 in Fifth Embodiment
FIG. 66 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. In the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment, a display effect counter 233 k is added to the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment.

  The display effect counter 233k is a counter used when determining which one of the sphere Q1 to the sphere Q4 to be displayed in the notice display of the speech advance notice displayed on the third symbol display device 81 moves to the comment window . The display effect counter 233 k is acquired in the process of the display conversation annunciation process (S 2511 in FIG. 68) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. In addition, 1 is added and updated in the process of S2107 of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. The initial value is set to 0, the upper limit value is 99, and when the value is updated to 99 and further updated, the initial value is updated to 0.

  Further, a display effect selection table 234a5 is added to the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment with respect to the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment. The display effect selection table 234a5 has been described above with reference to FIG. 63, and thus detailed description will be omitted.

Regarding Control Processing Executed by Display Control Device 114 in Fifth Embodiment
The command determination processing 4 (S2130) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 4 (S2130). In the command determination process 4 (FIG. 66, S2130) in the fifth embodiment, the display conversation annunciation process (FIG. 36, S2209) is a display conversation as compared with the command determination process (FIG. 34, S2102) in the first embodiment. It has been changed to the advance notice process 2 (FIG. 67, S2250). The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  The display conversation annunciation processing 2 (S2250) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing this display conversation annunciation process 2 (S2250).

  In the display conversation annunciation process 2 (FIG. 67, S2250), first, the value of the display effect counter 233k is acquired (S2511). After that, a conversation notice data table corresponding to the conversation notice command is determined from the conversation notice selection table 234a3 (S2512). Next, based on the value of the display effect counter 233k acquired in the process of S2511, the effect color corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is determined from the display effect selection table 1 (FIG. 63 (a)), and the conversation determined in S2512 Data indicating the selected effect color is set in the area 0 of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 (S2513).

  From the effect selection table for display 2 (see FIG. 63 (b)) based on the value of the remainder of the result of dividing 13 by the value obtained by dividing 13 by the value obtained by squaring the value of display effect counter 233k obtained in S2511 by the square. A display pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is selected, and sequentially set in the areas 1 to 3 of the work RAM 233 of the display control unit 114 (S 2514). The settings from area 1 to area 3 are set in advance for each display pattern, and are set to areas 1 to 3 in order from the left among the colors shown in FIG.

  As described above, when the display pattern is determined from the display effect selection table 2 (FIG. 63B), the value of the display effect counter 233 k is squared, 13 is added, and the remainder is divided by 100. By configuring so as to select, it is possible to prevent the problem that the combination of the effect color and the display pattern to be selected from the display effect selection table 1 (see FIG. 63A) becomes the same every time. Further, by calculating different values from the same counter, the number of counters can be reduced, and the amount of data can be reduced.

  The value of the display effect counter 233k acquired in the process of S2511 is divided by 4 to set the sphere Q1 to sphere Q4 to which the area 0 to the area 3 correspond based on the value of the remainder, and it is determined in the process of S2512 Information on the sphere Q1 to sphere Q4 is set in the conversation notice data table, and the conversation notice data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2515). The way of determining the sphere Q1 to sphere Q4 corresponding to the area 0 to the area 3 is processed as follows. The remaining values 0 to 3 are preset to correspond to the areas 0 to 3, respectively. Areas 0 to 3 are allocated to the sphere Q1 to sphere Q4 in ascending order from the value of the remainder.

  Specifically, assuming that the remainder value is 3, the data of area 3 is allocated to sphere Q1, the data of area 0 to sphere Q2, the data of area 1 to sphere Q3, and the data of area 2 to sphere Q4. Ru.

  By configuring in this manner, the effect colors displayed on the sphere Q1 to the sphere Q4 can be made random. Therefore, even when the same color combination is selected, the combination of the positions of the colors displayed on the sphere Q1 to the sphere Q4 can be made different, and the display mode can be diversified. Therefore, various effects can be provided by the player, and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game early.

  The transfer data table corresponding to the conversation advance notice data table set in the process of S2515 is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2516). The data table determination flag is set to ON (S2517), time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the data table (S2518), the pointer 233f is initialized (S2519), and this processing is ended.

  As described above, the selected color to be moved to the comment window is configured such that the red presentation color is more easily selected than the speech advance notice variation pattern in which the speech notice advance variation pattern of the jackpot deviates. Thus, when a red ball is displayed and moved to the comment window, the player can increase the expectation for the jackpot.

  Further, among the balls Q1 to Q4, the ball moving to the comment window is determined to be random, so the player first displays the balls Q1 to Q4 and moves in the case of a big hit in it. When there is a display color of a ball that has a high probability of doing, it is possible to play a game expecting that the ball does not move to the comment window.

  Also, with regard to the combinations of display colors of the sphere Q1 to sphere Q4, since the speech prediction fluctuation pattern of the jackpot is configured so that the combination of three or more reds is selected more than the speech prediction fluctuation pattern of the gap, The player can also expect the jackpot from the combination of the colors of the displayed balls Q1 to Q4.

  In the fifth embodiment, the balls Q1 to Q4 are displayed as notice symbols, and the background color of the comment window is changed by one of the colors, but the invention is not limited thereto. For example, “●” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence to the number of the number of pending items as a pending display mode indicating the number of pending balls, and the information in the winning information storage area 223a is determined before the start of fluctuation. , Based on the information, to change the color of the pending display. At the start of the change, the color of the comment window may be changed according to the color. In the case of determining the color of the hold display, as in the fifth embodiment, when the success or failure judgment result is a big hit, the player displays red by setting a high probability that red is selected. If you do, you can have the expectation of a jackpot. Furthermore, at the start of the change, the comment window of the conversation notice changes to that color, so that it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner even when a change in the color of the hold display is overlooked.

Regarding Modification of Pachinko Machine 10 According to Fifth Embodiment
Next, a modification of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fifth embodiment, the effect color to be moved to the comment window is selected, and then the colors of the remaining balls are determined. However, in the modification of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment, the display of the balls Q1 to Q4 is displayed. The difference is that each color is determined, and then processing for determining an effect color to be moved to the comment window is performed. The same elements as those of the fifth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 68 is a view schematically showing the display effect selection table 3 which is one type of the display effect selection table 234 a 5 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114. In the effect selection table 3 for display, the value of the display effect counter 233k is allocated to each combination of display colors of the sphere Q1 to sphere Q4 according to the result of the judgment of acceptance. The display color is set to four combinations of four colors of blue, yellow, green and red. The numbers shown in correspondence with the display colors of the display effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 68) indicate the number of spheres of that color.

  Specifically, if the result of the judgment is a hit, and the value of the display effect counter is 35, three green display colors and one red display color are displayed from the display effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 68). Is selected. The selected display colors are stored in areas 0 to 3 of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 in the order of being respectively predetermined. As the order of storage, areas 0 to 3 are stored in the order of blue, yellow, green and red of the display color shown in the display effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 68). If there are three green display colors and one red display color, data of display colors indicating green in area 0, green in area 1, green in area 2, and red in area 3 is stored. Ru. Furthermore, to give an example, if the result of the determination is a hit, and the display effect counter 233k is any of 41 to 55, one blue display color, one yellow display color, and green One display color and one red display color are respectively selected, and four display colors constituting the sphere Q1 to sphere Q4 are determined. In the modification of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the area 0 is set in advance corresponding to the sphere Q1, the area 1 to the sphere Q2, the area 2 to the sphere Q3, and the area 3 to the sphere Q4. There is.

  Then, according to the above-described predetermined order, data representing a display color of blue, yellow in area 1, green in area 2, and red in area 3 is stored in area 0 of work RAM 233 of display control device 114, respectively.

  In the display effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 68), when the result of the determination is a hit, the red display color is more easily selected than in the case where the result of the determination is a loss. . That is, the player can have an expectation for a hit when the display color of red is included in the ball Q. Therefore, by displaying the sphere Q1 to the sphere Q4, it is possible to predict the yes or no before the yes or no determination result is notified by the third symbol. Therefore, the player can enjoy the effect that the ball Q is displayed, and it is possible to suppress the player from getting bored early in the game.

  In addition, in the effect selection table for display 3 (FIG. 68), the case where two or more green display colors are included is set rather than the case where the result of the pass / fail judgment is a win, Also from this point, the player can predict the success or failure judgment result from the display color of the ball Q.

  In addition, by setting the selection probability to be different depending on whether the display color is selected or the same combination depending on whether the result of the determination is hit or not, it is possible to obtain It is possible to make it easy for the player to predict the success or failure judgment result from the display color.

  FIG. 69 is a view schematically showing the contents of the display effect selection table 4 which is one type of the display effect selection table 234a5 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display effect selection table 4 (see FIG. 69) is a data table for determining the sphere to be moved to the comment window among the spheres Q1 to Q4 determined from the display effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 68). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the values of the display effect counter 233k are allocated corresponding to the areas 0 to 3 separately in the case where the success or failure judgment result is a hit and the case where the judgment result is out. Specifically, if the result of the determination is a hit, and the acquired value of the display effect counter 233 k is 35, area 1, that is, the ball Q2 is determined as the ball (selected color) to move to the comment window. In addition, the value of the display effect counter 233k of a different range is each allocated to the area 0-the area 3 by the case where it is a hit, and the case where it is remove | deviation. Also, in the case of a hit, area 2 and area 3, that is, the sphere Q 3 and the sphere Q 4 are set so as to be more easily selected than in the case of detachment.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily set different balls to be selected depending on whether the ball is hit or not. Therefore, the result of the pass / fail judgment can be predicted from the selected ball.

  Also, if it is a hit, it is easier to select area 2 and area 3 than in the case of leaving area 2 and area 3 and area 3 have green and red display colors according to a predetermined storage order. Since it is configured to be easily stored, it is configured to be easily selected as a display color to be moved to the comment window in red or green. Therefore, it is possible to easily predict the result of the judgment of the success or failure from the display color of the ball Q moving to the comment window, and it is possible to give the player new enjoyment.

Control Process Executed by Display Control Device 114 According to Modification of Fifth Embodiment
In the modification of the fifth embodiment, the display conversation announcement processing 2 (FIG. 67, S2250) of the command determination processing 4 (FIG. 66, S2130) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment is for display. It is changed to conversation advance notice processing 3 (FIG. 70, S2260). The other processes are the same as those in the fifth embodiment, and therefore the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  The display conversation annunciation processing 3 (S2260) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 according to the modification of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing this display conversation annunciation process 3 (S2260).

  In the display conversation annunciation process 3 (FIG. 70, S2260), first, the value of the display effect counter 233k is acquired (S2521). Thereafter, a conversation notice data table corresponding to the conversation notice command is determined from the conversation notice selection table 234a3 (S2522). Next, based on the value of the display effect counter 233k acquired in the process of S2521, the display color corresponding to the result of the determination of the success or failure is selected from the display effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 68). It stores in each of the areas 0 to 3 of the RAM 233 in a predetermined order. Here, the predetermined order is stored from area 0 to area 3 in ascending order in the order of the display colors shown in the display effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 68) (S 2523).

  Any of the areas 0 to 3 from the effect selection table for display 4 (refer to FIG. 69) based on the value of the remainder of the result of dividing the value of the display effect counter 233k acquired in the process of S2521 by 4 and the result of the pass / fail judgment. Is selected, and the selection result is set as one of the selected colors of the sphere Q1 to sphere Q4 to be moved to the comment window (S2524).

  The display colors of the sphere Q1 to sphere Q4 determined in the process of S2523 and the sphere (selected color) to be moved to the comment window determined in the process of S2524 are respectively set in the conversation notice data table determined in the process of S2522. (S2525).

  The transfer data table corresponding to the conversation advance notice data table set in the process of S2522 is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2526). The data table determination flag is set to ON (S2527), time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the data table (S2528), the pointer 233f is initialized (S2529), and this processing is ended.

  As described above, by determining each display color of the sphere Q1 to sphere Q4 first, and determining the sphere (selected color) to be moved to the comment window from among them, of the sphere Q1 to sphere Q4 to the comment window The selected color to be moved can be set randomly.

  In addition, when the result of the judgment is a hit, red is easily selected by the display color to be selected, and even with the selected color, the red display color is easily determined than when the sphere Q4 is easily determined. Therefore, by displaying red, it is possible to give the player the expectation of the jackpot. Furthermore, by moving the sphere of the red display color to the comment window, it is possible to further amplify the expectation for the jackpot.

  Further, by moving the sphere Q4 to the comment window, even if the color of the sphere Q4 is a display color other than red, an expectation to a big hit can be given, and the sphere Q1 to the sphere Q4 are red. Even if the display color is not included, the player can be expected to have a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a defect that the player loses the expectation to the jackpot from the display colors of the balls Q1 to Q4 and is disappointed early.

<About Pachinko Machine 10 in the Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 71 to 77, a pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, in the conversation notice performed when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects the conversation notice variation pattern, the conversation notice is made when the contents of the conversation are established with predetermined contents. The case where presentation is performed was explained. On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, in the notice of conversation, when the contents of the conversation are established, the effect of causing the player to operate the frame button 22 is executed to determine whether or not the notice of conversation notice is performed. It differs in that the process which performs alerting | reporting is performed. Furthermore, in the first embodiment, after the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped among the third symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a comment indicating the content of the conversation is displayed from the left symbol, and then, Although the comment indicating the content of the conversation is displayed from the right symbol, in the sixth embodiment, the left symbol is stopped and the middle symbol and the right symbol are scrolled (variation display), and the left symbol is displayed. It is different in that it is configured to display a comment indicating the content of the conversation notice from the symbol, and then to stop and display the right symbol and display a comment indicating the content of the conversation notice from the right symbol. The same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIGS. 71 (a) to (c) and FIGS. 72 (a) to (c) are diagrams showing the display modes of the conversation notice displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 71 (a) shows a state in which the third symbol starts to be changed and the left symbol is stopped and the comment which is the content of the conversation is displayed in the variation mode of the third symbol in the conversation advance notice variation pattern. FIG. In this case, the middle symbol and the right symbol are scrolled downward from the top of the third symbol at high speed or low speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), the right symbol is stopped and displayed, and the contents of the conversation are displayed. In the case of FIG. 71 (b), the conversation content of the right symbol is “Good !!!” and the conversation is established as opposed to “Let's compete?” Of the conversation content of the left symbol, so the conversation notice Shows the case where On the other hand, in FIG. 72 (c), even when the right symbol is stopped, the comment of the conversation content is not displayed from the right symbol, and the case where the comment is not established is shown. As described above, when the conversation is not established, the middle symbol is then stopped and displayed with one of the symbols, and it is informed that the result of the determination of the success or failure is out.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), after the conversation is established, as shown in FIG. 71 (c), the character “press the button to inform the player to press the frame button 22 !! "Is displayed. In addition, at this time, since the variable display of the middle symbol disappears or is hidden by characters, two “o” s are displayed at the lower right of the third symbol display device 81 and are alternately displayed in a blinking manner. It is configured to notify that the symbol is changing.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (a), when the frame button 22 is pressed, the "competition effect" shown in FIG. 6 (c) which is a conversation advance notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The words “Success production” will be displayed. On the other hand, even if the conversation is established, if it is a fluctuation pattern in which the conversation advance presentation effect is not executed, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), the player is informed that the conversation advance presentation effect is not executed. Is displayed.

  With this configuration, the display mode in which the conversation is established can be displayed even in the variation pattern in which the conversation advance presentation effect is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that many effects for which a conversation is not established are displayed.

  In addition, when the conversation is established, it is possible to make the player feel as if it is drawn by pressing the frame button 22 whether or not the conversation preview effect is executed, and the frame button 22 is pressed. The player can be given fun to do.

  In the present embodiment, when the conversation is established, the frame button 22 is pressed to notify that the conversation preview effect is to be executed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the frame button 22 may be pressed. The value of the display effect counter 233k may be acquired to determine whether the value is a predetermined hit value, and in the case of a hit, the conversation advance notice effect may be executed. In this case, the conversation advance notice variation pattern is configured to be established whether or not the conversation advance presentation effect is executed, and data tables for display of the conversation advance notice and the conversation advance presentation effect are separately set. However, if a conversation announcement effect is executed, a data table dedicated to conversation announcement effect is set, but if a conversation announcement effect is not executed, the display set in the display data table of the conversation advance variation pattern is displayed. The display contents based on the data may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  With this configuration, it is possible to randomly determine whether or not the speech advance announcement effect is executed, and the player can enjoy the fluctuation of the speech advance fluctuation pattern in various patterns.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Sixth Embodiment
The electrical configuration of the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a block diagram of the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment.

  In the display control device 114 according to the sixth embodiment, a button pressing flag 233n and a button effect flag 233p are added to the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, as compared with the first embodiment.

  The button pressing flag 233 n is a flag indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed. The button press flag 233n is pressed (operated) by the voice lamp control device 113 during the effective period in the processing of S2271 of the command determination processing 5 (FIG. 75, S2140) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is set to ON when a button pressing command output based on the event is received. On the other hand, in the process of S3056 of the button pressing effect process (S3050 in FIG. 77) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, it is set to off. The button pressing flag 233 n is set to OFF in the initial setting executed at the time of power on or the like.

  The button effect flag 233p is a flag indicating that the pressing (operation) of the frame button 22 is set to be a valid button valid period (set based on a conversation advance notice variation pattern). The button effect flag 233p is set to ON based on the start timing of the button valid period in the process of S3052 of the button pressing effect process (S3050 in FIG. 77) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. On the other hand, in the process of S3059, it is set to off based on the end of the button valid period.

<Control Processing of Voice Lamp Controller 113 in Sixth Embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 74, the frame button input monitoring and effect process (S1307), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the sixth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring and effect process (S1307).

  In the frame button input monitoring / rendering process (S1307 in FIG. 74), first, it is determined whether the value of the SW valid time counter (not shown) is 0 (S1341). The SW effective time counter is a counter provided in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and is a counter for counting the effective time of the frame button 22. The SW valid time counter is automatically set when a fluctuation pattern (in the present embodiment, a hit or missed conversation advance fluctuation pattern) in which a button valid period for setting the frame button 22 effectively is set is set in advance. Are set.

  If it is determined in the process of S1341 that the value of the SW effective time counter is 0 (S1341: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter is larger than 0 (S1341: No), the value of the SW effective time counter is decremented by 1 (S1342). It is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (operated) (S1343). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1343: Yes), a button pressing command is set (S1344). Thereafter, the value of the SW effective time counter is set to 0 (S1345). On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed in the process of S1343 (S1343: No), this process ends.

  In addition, about the other control processing which MPU221 of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 in 6th Embodiment performs, since the same processing as the control processing in 1st Embodiment is performed, the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

<About Control Processing Executed by Display Control Device 114 in Sixth Embodiment>
In the V interrupt process (not shown) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the sixth embodiment, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 33B) Command determination processing (FIG. 34, S2102) and display setting processing (FIG. 38, S2103) are command processing 5 (FIG. 75, S2140) and display setting processing 2 (FIG. 76, S2180). Each has been changed to. The other processes are the same as the control processes performed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 according to the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The command determination process 5 (S2140) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 5 (S2140). In the command determination process 5 (FIG. 75, S2140) in the sixth embodiment, each process of S2270 to S2271 is added to the command determination process (FIG. 34, S2102) in the first embodiment. Further, in the processes of S2201 to S2213 and S2219 in the sixth embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S2201 to S2213 and S2219 in the first embodiment are executed.

  When it is determined in the process of S2210 that the display conversation advance notice dedicated stop type command has not been received from the voice lamp control device 113 (S2210: No), a button pressing command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. It is determined whether or not there is (S2270). If it is determined that the button pressing command is received (S2270: Yes), the button pressing flag 233n is set to ON (S2271). On the other hand, when it is determined that the button pressing command is not received from the voice lamp control device 113 (S2270: No), the processing of S2212 is executed.

  Next, display setting processing 2 (S2180) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing this display setting process 2 (S2180). In the display setting process 2 (FIG. 76, S2180) in the sixth embodiment, the process of S3050 is added to the display setting process (FIG. 38, S2103) in the first embodiment. In the processes of S3001 to S3021 in the sixth embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S3001 to S3021 in the first embodiment are executed.

  After the process of S3007 is performed, the process of S3050 is performed. In the process of S3050, a button pressing effect process is performed. The details of the button pressing effect process (S3050) will be described with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the button pressing effect process (S3050) which is one process of the display setting process 2 (FIG. 76, S2180) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the sixth embodiment Do. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing this button depression effect process (S3050).

  In the button pressing effect process (FIG. 77, S3050), first, it is determined whether it is the start of the button valid period (S3051). Whether it is the start of the button valid period is set in advance in the display data table of the set conversation advance notice variation pattern, and is determined by the setting. When it is determined in the process of S3051 that the start of the button effective period is determined (S3051: Yes), the button effect flag 233p is set to ON (S3052). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the start of the button valid period (S3051: No), the processing of S3053 is executed.

  In the process of S3053, it is determined whether or not the button is in a valid period (S3053). If it is determined that the button is in the valid period (S3053: Yes), it is determined whether the button pressing flag 233n is on (S3054). If it is determined that the button pressing flag 233n is on (S3054: Yes), the conversation advance notice determination data table is displayed on the display data table buffer 233d of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 based on the selected fluctuation pattern. It sets to (S3055). Note that this conversation advance notice determination data table is a data table in which a notification form as to whether or not the conversation advance announcement effect shown in FIGS. 72 (a) and 72 (b) is executed is set. Thereafter, the button pressing flag 233 n and the button effect flag 233 p are set to OFF respectively (S 3056). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3054 that the button pressing flag 233n is off (S3054: No), this process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S3053 that the button is not in effect (S3053: No), it is determined whether the button effect flag 233p is on (S3057). If it is determined that the button effect flag 233p is on (S3057: Yes), an alternative advance notice display data table (not shown) is set (S3058). The alternative notice display data table is used to inform the player that the player has not pressed the frame button 22 during the button validity period. For example, a character or the like is displayed to display the character A notice etc. indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed are displayed instead of the player. Thereafter, the button effect flag 233p is set to off (S3059), and the process ends.

  As described above, it is possible to determine that the player does not press the frame button 22 by determining whether the button effect flag 233p is set to ON although the button is not in the valid period. Therefore, even when the frame button 22 is not pressed, displaying the alternative display mode can suppress the problem that the presentation of the conversation notice is not consistent. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the player has a sense of discomfort in the effect.

  In addition, when it is determined that the button effect flag 233p is off in the process of S3057 (S3057: No), this process ends.

<About Pachinko Machine 10 in the Seventh Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 87. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, it is determined whether the stop symbol of the front variation is the stop symbol capable of notifying a conversation notice, and it is determined whether or not the conversation notice is to be executed in the next variation. The case where the content (comment content) is displayed has been described. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the maximum time for displaying a speech notice is set in advance in the speech notice variation pattern, and within that time, the player's frame button 22 is selected. The second embodiment is different from the second embodiment in that the next set comment is displayed based on the operation. The same elements as those of the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<About the presentation aspect of the notice of conversation in a 7th embodiment>
FIGS. 78 (a) to 78 (c) are diagrams showing an effect mode in the speech advance notice displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. In the speech advance notice shown in FIG. 78 (a), the success / failure judgment result shown in FIG. 81 is out, and the speech advance notice content of pattern 2 selected when the speech advance notice is established or the success / failure judgment result shown in FIG. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a first conversation notice content determined from the conversation notice content of pattern 2 selected when the game state (probability change gaming state) is hit. FIG. 78 (a) is a figure which shows the state by which the comment which shows conversation content from the left symbol and the right symbol was displayed, respectively. In practice, the conversation content is displayed earlier than the right symbol than the left symbol, and then, after a predetermined time, a comment indicating the conversation content is displayed from the right symbol. During this time, the middle symbol is scrolled from the top to the bottom at high speed or low speed.

  Thereafter, when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the second pattern of the above-described conversation notice pattern table (FIG. 81 or 82) is displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol. The notice content of the conversation is displayed. Here, the figure of the state as which the comment content was each displayed from the left symbol and the right symbol was shown. In practice, the comment content is displayed prior to the left symbol, and then, after a predetermined time, the comment of the conversation content is displayed from the right symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (b), when it becomes the contents in which the conversation is established, a conversation advance notice effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 78 (c). In the conversation advance notice effect shown in FIG. 78 (b), the player competes to the goal with a plurality of symbols including the left symbol and the right symbol, and reaches the reach with the symbol reached to the goal first. It is informing. In addition, when this conversation advance notice effect is displayed, two “o” s are displayed side by side in the lower right of the third symbol display device 81 and are alternately displayed in a blinking manner. This is a temporary symbol of the third symbol, and blinks to notify the player that the third symbol is being displayed in a variable manner.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the odd symbols of "1, 3, 5, 7" indicate that a high probability gaming state is given which makes the probability of determining a big hit higher than that in the normal state in a hit / not determination after a big hit In the symbols, the even symbols of "2, 4, 6, 8" are respectively set to symbols indicating that the normal gaming state, which is the normal probability of success or failure, is given even after the jackpot. Therefore, the player can expect whether or not the symbol indicating that the high probability gaming state is given will reach the first place by the talk notice effect and reach the reach. Therefore, it is possible to play a game with an interest in which symbol wins. Therefore, it is possible to play with interest in the game until the player gets a jackpot, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

  Further, although details will be described later, by pressing the frame button 22, it is possible to display other types of comments such as the left symbol and the right symbol. Furthermore, since the conversation advance notice pattern table (see FIGS. 81 and 82) is set so that the content of the conversation to be selected differs depending on the result of the success or failure determination, the player selects the left symbol and the right symbol according to the content of the comment. It can be determined which is easier to reach the goal first.

  In the seventh embodiment, when the odd symbols on the left symbol and the even symbols on the right symbol are stopped and displayed in the front variation, it is set that the conversation notice is performed, so the player performs the conversation notice of the conversation notice. When it is established, it can be known while enjoying by the conversation advance presentation, which of the odd symbol and the even symbol is reached.

  In the present embodiment, in the conversation advance notice pattern table (see FIG. 81 and FIG. 82), the comment contents up to the third, that is, the comment until the player presses the frame button 22 twice within the maximum conversation advance notice period Is configured to be changed and displayed based on that, but not limited thereto, it may be configured to configure more or less.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it was comprised so that some of the 1 to 9 3rd designs set beforehand may be displayed and conversation advance presentation production | presentation might be performed, for example, the 1st design of the 3rd design In addition to some of them, a temporary symbol or the like (for example, a character to which the letter X is assigned) may be displayed that does not indicate which of the high probability gaming state and the normal gaming state will be awarded. . By configuring in this way, the reach can be established with a temporary symbol, and the player can have an expectation for the high probability gaming state until the jackpot is started or until the game is played after the jackpot. it can.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (b), the display periods of the speech advance notice and the speech advance notice effect in the speech advance notice in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 79 (a) is a time chart showing a case where the conversation advance presentation effect of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment is established, and FIG. Is a time chart showing the case where the condition is not established.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (a), a maximum conversation annunciation period, which is the maximum period in which conversation annunciation can be performed, is set in advance in the conversation annunciation fluctuation pattern in which the conversation annunciation is established. In the present embodiment, the maximum conversation annunciation period is set to 5 seconds before display of a reach display mode such as super reach is started from the start of fluctuation. Therefore, the speech advance notice period shown in FIG. 79 (a) is configured to be variable within the range of the maximum speech advance notice period. Note that this conversation advance notice period is set for a predetermined period (5 seconds in the present embodiment) after the button valid period (set between the first conversation contents being displayed and the maximum conversation notice period) is set. ), It is set to end when the frame button 22 is not pressed.

  After that, the remaining time until the start of the reach display mode is determined, and the conversation advance presentation effect is executed. With regard to this conversation advance presentation effect, three types of conversation advance presentation effects are set by the conversation advance presentation effect data table as shown in FIGS. It is configured to select a conversation notice effect data table composed of presentation times closest to the time from the end of the conversation notice period to the start of the reach display mode. The shorter the effect time, the shorter the time it takes for the symbol to reach the goal after the conversation advance effect is displayed (the moving speed is faster). In addition, about the remaining time until a reach display mode is displayed, after the symbol goals, the last display content which the symbols scored is displayed repeatedly.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to produce an announcement of conversation announcement according to the player who presses the frame button 22 and the player who does not press the frame button 22. Further, by pressing the frame button 22, different effects are displayed as compared with the case where the frame button 22 is not pressed, and it is possible to give the player the pleasure of pressing the frame button 22.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), when the speech advance notice is not established, the period from the start of fluctuation of the third symbol to the time of temporary suspension of fluctuation is set as the maximum speech advance notice period. Thus, the conversation notice can be enjoyed until the symbol is temporarily stopped. Therefore, even in the case where the result of the judgment of the success or failure is out, it is possible to play the game with the expectation to the jackpot by the speech advance notice.

Electrical Configuration of Display Control Device 114 in Seventh Embodiment
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment is different from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. FIG. 80 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the seventh embodiment. In the display control device 114 according to the seventh embodiment, a button pressing flag 233n, a button effect flag 223p, and an elapsed counter 233r are added to the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, as compared with the second embodiment. In addition, in the character commission ROM 234 of the display control device 114, a conversation advance notice pattern table 234a6 and a conversation advance notice effect data table 234a7 are respectively added. The other configuration is the same as that of the second embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The button pressing flag 233 n and the button effect flag 233 p are the same as those described in the sixth embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The elapsed counter 233 r is a counter for counting the time until the frame button 22 is pressed when the button valid period is set. This progress counter 233 r is incremented by one when it is determined that the button is in the valid period in the process of S 3064 of the button pressing effect process 2 (S 3060 in FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the button pressing flag 233n indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed is on in the process of S3067, the initial value is reset to 0. The progress counter 233r is set to end the conversation annunciation period if it is equal to or more than a predetermined value (a count value corresponding to 5 seconds in the present embodiment) in the process of S3065.

  The conversation advance notice pattern table 234a6 is a data table for determining the comment contents of the conversation advance notice. The speech advance notice pattern table 234a6 is composed of a speech advance notice pattern table (disengagement) shown in FIG. 81 and a talk advance notice pattern table (per) shown in FIG.

  The conversation advance notice pattern table (disengagement) shown in FIG. 81 is a table selected when the result of the pass / fail judgment is out. Furthermore, the selected speech announcement variation pattern for outliers is a fluctuation pattern in which the conversation announcement speech is established or a fluctuation pattern in which the conversation announcement is not established. It is set. The value of the display effect counter 233k is allocated to each of the patterns 1 to 3.

  Specifically, for example, it is a variation pattern of a speech advance notice in which the result of judgment of yes / no is out, the speech of the speech advance notice is not established, and the value of the display effect counter is 40. Is selected. When this pattern 2 is selected, a comment saying "Let's compete together!" Is first displayed from the left symbol, which is the first comment content, and then, after a predetermined time, "..." from the right symbol The comment of is displayed. After that, when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player within 5 seconds, a comment “Please” is displayed from the left symbol which is the second comment, and then, after a predetermined time, from the right symbol “ A comment saying “How should I do” is displayed. After that, when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player within 5 seconds, a comment “Yeowyo !!” is displayed from the left symbol, and then, after a predetermined time, “Don't stop this time! Comment is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is not pressed for 5 seconds after the first or second comment is displayed, the display is switched from the comment of the conversation notice to the display mode set to the conversation notice variation pattern and displayed.

  As described above, within the maximum conversation advance notice period, the display of the comment can be switched according to the operation of the frame button 22. Even if the comment for which the conversation advance notice conversation is not established is displayed once, the player By pressing the frame button 22, it can have an expectation that it may change to a conversation that is established.

  Next, the conversation advance notice pattern table (per) shown in FIG. 82 is a table selected when the result of the pass / fail judgment is a per hand. In the speech advance notice pattern table (per) shown in FIG. 82, the speech advance notice pattern is divided into the case where jackpot type is jackpot A (16 round probability variation jackpot) and the case where jackpot B (16 round normally jackpot). Pattern 1 to pattern 3 are respectively set. The value of the display effect counter 233k is allocated to each of the patterns 1 to 3. In the pattern 2, the value of the display effect counter 233k is set to the largest, and is configured to be easily selected.

  Here, the conversation content of pattern 2 in the case of jackpot A will be described. In addition, the conversation advance notice in the seventh embodiment is executed when the odd symbols on the left symbol and the even symbols on the right symbol are stopped in the stop symbols of the front variation. Therefore, in the left symbol, a symbol notifying that it is a big hit A when it is a big hit, and a symbol giving a notification that it is a big hit B when it is a big hit to the right symbol are conversation notice Is executed.

  In the conversation notice of pattern 2 in the case of jackpot A, at the timing of the start of fluctuation of the speech advance notice variation pattern, a comment "Let's compete with everyone!" Is displayed from the left symbol. Thereafter, after a predetermined time, a comment "Good!" Is displayed from the right symbol, and it is informed that the conversation has been established. After that, when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player within 5 seconds, a comment “I win this time !!” is displayed from the left symbol. Then, after a predetermined time, a comment "is likely to lose ..." is displayed from the right symbol, and a comment is displayed which makes the player expect the left symbol to be won in the conversation advance presentation effect. After that, when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player within 5 seconds, a comment “The condition is excellent!” Is displayed from the left symbol, and after a predetermined time thereafter, the word “Yabiina ...” A comment is displayed, and a comment which makes the player expect the left symbol to win is displayed.

  By configuring in this manner, since the left symbol is the symbol to which the jackpot A is given when the jackpot is hit, it is possible to make the player more expect to be the jackpot A. Also, in fact, when the judgment result is jackpot A, it is easier to be selected than in the case where the speech advance notice of this pattern 2 is jackpot B, so it can be expected that jackpot A will be a jackpot.

  On the other hand, in the conversation contents of pattern 2 selected when the determination result is the jackpot B, the second and subsequent comments of the jackpot A and the left symbol and the right symbol are exchanged. Thus, the player expects to be a big hit B, not a big hit A. However, since the pattern 3 in the case where the judgment result is the jackpot A is set to the same conversation content as this pattern 2, even with this pattern 2, the expectation to the jackpot is completely lost. It can prevent.

  As described above, since the conversation pattern for notifying the jackpot type is set to have a higher probability of selecting the speech advance notice pattern according to the jackpot type, it is possible to determine the success / failure determination result and the jackpot type from the conversation content. Therefore, the player's attention can be drawn to the conversation pattern more. Therefore, the conversation announcement can be more entertained by the player.

  The speech advance presentation effect data table 234a7 is a data table for displaying the speech advance announcement effect shown in FIG. 78 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. In this conversation advance presentation effect data table 234a7, the conversation advance presentation effect data table 1 in which the presentation time shown in FIG. 83 (a) is set to 10 seconds and the conversation in which the presentation time shown in FIG. 83 (b) is set to 8 seconds The notice effect data table 2 and the conversation notice effect data table 3 in which the effect time shown in FIG. 84 is set to 5 seconds are respectively formed.

  Background data indicating the background of the competition, display data indicating a symbol to be displayed, and various effect display data are set in the conversation advance notice data table 234a7. Although omitted, as with the display data table in the first embodiment, parameters such as various display positions and an enlargement factor are also set. In the conversation notice effect data tables 1 to 3 having different presentation times, the speeds at which the symbols move to the goals are set to be different. Specifically, the displacement of the display position of the symbol is set to be variable for each address. In addition to the above description, a plurality of symbols are set for the symbol to be won and each symbol to be displayed, in addition to the above description.

<Control Process Performed by Voice Lamp Controller 113 in Seventh Embodiment>
The frame button input monitoring / rendering process (S1307) of the main process (not shown) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment is the frame button input monitoring / rendering process (FIG. 74) in the sixth embodiment. , S1307) is executed. The other processes are the same as those in the second embodiment.

Control Process Performed by Display Control Device 114 in Seventh Embodiment
In the V interrupt process (not shown) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the seventh embodiment, the V interrupt process (not shown) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second embodiment is performed. The command determination process 2 (FIG. 48, S2110) and the display setting process (FIG. 38, S2103) which are one process are respectively command determination process 6 (FIG. 85, S2190) and the display setting process 3 (FIG. 86, S2650). has been changed. The other processes are the same as the control processes performed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 according to the second embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The command determination processing 6 (S2190) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2190). The command determination process 6 (FIG. 85, S2190) in the seventh embodiment is different from the command determination process 2 (FIG. 48, S2110) in the second embodiment in that the display conversation annunciation process (S2209) is changed to the process of S2280. The processing of S2281 to S2282 is added. In the processes of S2201 to S2206, S2215 to S2218, and S2220 to S2223, the same processes as those of S2201 to S2206, S2215 to S2218, and S2220 to S2223 in the second embodiment are performed.

  If it is determined in the process of S2221 that the variation pattern is the one that enables conversation notice to be established (S2221: Yes), the value of the display effect counter 233k is acquired, and the value is based on the value and the result of determination and the jackpot type. Then, the speech advance notice pattern is selected from the speech advance notice pattern table 234a6 (S2280).

  If it is determined in the process of S2206 that the display stop type command has not been received (S2206: No), it is determined whether a button pressing command has been received from the audio lamp control device 113 (S2281). If it is determined that the button pressing command is received (S2281: Yes), the button pressing flag 233n is set to ON (S2282).

  Next, display setting processing 3 (S2650) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this display setting process 3 (S2650). In the display setting process 3 (FIG. 86, S2650) in the seventh embodiment, a button depression effect process 2 (FIG. 87, S3060) is added to the display setting process (FIG. 38, S2103) in the second embodiment. There is. The other processes are the same as those in the second embodiment.

  After the process of S3007 is executed, button depression effect process 2 is executed (S3060). The details of the button pressing effect process 2 (S3060) will be described with reference to FIG.

  With reference to FIG. 87, button press effect processing 2 (S3060) which is one of display setting processing 3 (FIG. 86, S2650) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the button depression effect process 2 (S3060).

  In button press effect processing 2 (FIG. 87, S3060), first, it is determined whether it is the start of the button valid period (S3061). Whether it is the start of the button valid period is set in advance in the display data table of the set conversation advance notice variation pattern, and is determined by the setting. When it is determined in the process of S3061 that the start of the button effective period is determined (S3061: Yes), the button effect flag 233p is set to ON (S3062). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the start of the button valid period (S3061: No), the processing of S3063 is executed.

  In the process of S3063, it is determined whether it is in the button valid period (S3063). If it is determined that the button is in the valid period (S3063: Yes), the value of the progress counter 233r is incremented by one (S3064). It is determined whether the value of the progress counter 233r is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (S3065). In the present embodiment, the predetermined value here is set to a value indicating 5 seconds. If it is determined in the process of S3065 that the value of the progress counter 233r is less than the predetermined value (S3065: No), it is determined whether the button pressing flag 233n is on (S3066). If it is determined that the button pressing flag 233 n is off (S 3066: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the button pressing flag 233 n is on (S 3066: Yes), the value of the progress counter 233 r is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S 3067).

  Thus, based on the fact that the button pressing flag 233n indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed is determined to be on, by resetting the progress counter 233r, the time when the frame button 22 is not pressed can be accurately determined. You can time it.

  After the process of S3067 is executed, display data of the next conversation content is set in the display data table buffer 233d based on the selected conversation advance notice pattern (S3068), and the button pressing flag 233n is set to off. (S3069). Here, if the data of the first conversation content is set, the data of the second conversation content, and if the data of the second conversation content is set, the data of the third conversation content Is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the button is not valid in the process of S3063 (S3063: No), or if the value of the progress counter 233r is determined to be equal to or greater than the predetermined value in the process of S3065 (S3065: Yes The process of S3070 is executed. In the process of S3070, it is determined whether the button effect flag 233p is on (S3070). If it is determined that the button effect flag 233p is off (S3070: No), this process ends.

  If it is determined that the button effect flag 233p is on (S3070: Yes), it is determined whether the selected conversation advance notice variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a conversation is established (S3071). When it is determined that the variation pattern is that the conversation is established (S3071: Yes), the conversation advance presentation effect data table is determined based on the remaining time until the reach display mode. Here, for example, in the case where the remaining time is 10 seconds or more, the conversation advance presentation effect data table 1 (see FIG. 83 (a)) having the rendering time of 10 seconds is selected, and the remaining time is less than 8 seconds to 10 seconds. In the case, conversation announcement effect data table 2 (see FIG. 83 (b)) is selected, and if the remaining time is 5 seconds or more and less than 8 seconds, conversation announcement effect data table 3 (see FIG. 83 (c)). Is selected.

  In this manner, by selecting one of the conversation notice effect data tables 1 to 3 based on the remaining time until the reach display mode is started, the reach display mode is started. By making effective use of time, it is possible to carry out a talk advance presentation. In addition, since the maximum conversation annunciation period is set 5 seconds before the reach display mode is started, even if the remaining time is the shortest, all the speech annunciation effects can be shown to the player .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3070 that the variation pattern is such that the conversation is not established (S3071: No), the process of S3073 is executed.

  In the process of S3073, the end of conversational annunciation is set (S3073). Here, when the conversation advance notice effect is being executed, the display data of the last address of the conversation advance notice effect data table is set to be repeatedly displayed and set until the reach display mode is started. In addition, when the notice of conversation is not established and the notice of conversation is ended, the display based on the display data table of the set conversation notice change pattern is displayed.

  After the process of S3073 is executed, the button effect flag 233p is set to OFF (S3074), and the progress counter 233r and the button valid period are reset to 0 which is an initial value (S3075).

<About Pachinko Machine 10 in Eighth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91, a pachinko machine 10 according to an eighth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, when the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, a stop symbol determination flag for determining the stop symbol is displayed. The process which memorize | stored in the area which memorize | stores the last stop symbol discrimination flag was performed. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the area for storing the previous stop symbol determination flag is not provided and the process for storing the previous stop symbol determination flag is not executed. . Further, in the eighth embodiment, similarly to the second embodiment, the stop symbol of the previous change is determined, it is determined whether the conversation announcement is executable, and the conversation announcement is executed. It differs from the first embodiment. The same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

<Control Process Performed by Voice Lamp Controller 113 in Eighth Embodiment>
The control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment is a variation display of the main processing (see FIG. 28) with respect to the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. The setting process (FIG. 30, S1312) is changed to the variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 47, S1320). Incidentally, since the variation display setting process 2 (FIG. 47, S1320) has already been described in detail in the second embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

Control Process Performed by Display Control Device 114 in Eighth Embodiment
In the V interrupt process (not shown) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the eighth embodiment, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 33B) Command determination processing (FIG. 34, S2102) and display setting processing (FIG. 38, S2103) are command processing 7 (FIG. 89, S2350) and display setting processing 4 (FIG. 91, S2750). Each has been changed to. The other processes are the same as the control processes performed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 according to the second embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The command determination processing 7 (S2350) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 7 (S2350). The command determination process 7 (FIG. 89, S2350) in the eighth embodiment is different from the command determination process (FIG. 34, S2102) in the first embodiment in fluctuation pattern command processing (FIG. 35A, S2205). The process is changed to pattern command process 3 (FIG. 90, S2450), and the processes of S2208 to S2211 are deleted. The other processes are the same as in the first embodiment.

  If it is determined in the process of S2204 that the display variation pattern command has been received (S2204: Yes), variation pattern command processing 3 is executed (S2450). The variation pattern command processing 3 (S2450) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  Variation pattern command processing 3 (S2450) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing 3 (S2450).

  In the variation pattern command process 3 (FIG. 90, S2450), first, it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h is equal to or more than a predetermined value (in the present embodiment, a value indicating 3 seconds or more) (S2451). If it is determined that the value of the clock counter 233h is less than the predetermined value (S2451: No), it is determined whether the stored stop symbol determination flag indicates a symbol that can be used to announce a conversation. In addition, the symbol which can be notified of a conversation here is a combination in which a left symbol and a right symbol become symbols other than reach.

  In addition, although it was set as combinations other than reach in this embodiment, you may give a notice of conversation not only in it but in combination of reach. In such a case, even if it stops at the stop symbol of the reach out, by performing the conversation announcement in the next change, it can appear as if the two changes are one change. In addition, even if it is a symbol of all the same symbols after the jackpot, it may be configured to execute the conversation notice. In such a case, it is possible to prevent the player from immediately stopping the game after the jackpot by setting a special conversation notice, for example, a conversation about the contents regarding the jackpot.

  If it is determined in the process of S2452 that the stop symbol determination flag indicates a symbol that can be used to give notice of conversation (S2452: Yes), the selected variation pattern is that the conversation will be established Is determined (S2453). If it is determined that the variation pattern is a conversation (S2453: Yes), the display conversation annunciation process is executed (S2209). The display conversation annunciation process (S2209) is the same as that described in the first embodiment with reference to FIG. 36, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2453 that the conversation advance notice variation pattern is a failure to establish a conversation (S2453: No), a display conversation dummy advance notice process is executed (S2222). The display conversation dummy annunciation process (S2222) has already been described in detail in the second embodiment with reference to FIG. 49 (b), so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of S2456, the display data table corresponding to the fluctuation rendering pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is determined, and the determined display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d. (S2456).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2301, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is selected. It sets to the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is main controller 110 Receive the next display change pattern command from the main control unit 110 while displaying the fluctuation effect according to the set display data table on the third symbol display device 81 when instructed by the Since another variable display is suddenly started, there is a possibility that the player may feel discomfort.

  On the other hand, by setting the display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time to the display data table buffer 233 d as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time longer than the display data table actually set is Even when the variable effect having the symbol is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the change effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is finished, the next display pattern from the main controller 110 Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the command is received, the player can feel comfortable with the third symbol display device 81. You can keep watching the pattern fluctuation.

  Next, initial symbol information is set in the display data table set in the process of S2456 based on the stop symbol determination flag (S2456). Here, in the display data table in the eighth embodiment, initial symbol information is set for all offset information of symbol display until high-speed variation ends based on the stop symbol determination flag. Thereby, the third symbol is scroll-displayed one by one without discomfort from the stop symbol of the front change at the start of the change, and the high-speed change display is switched to the low-speed change display based on the stop symbol determination flag determined by the current change. The symbol can be offset by offset information and displayed variably, and can be stopped and displayed naturally with the correct stop symbol.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2456 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and it is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2458). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table set by the process of S2456 is turned on, and the other display data tables The data table determination flag corresponding to is set to off (S2459). In the display setting process, it is easily determined which fluctuation pattern the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d corresponds to by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S 2303. can do.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2456, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2460), and the pointer 233f Is initialized to 0 (S2461). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S2462).

  Next, display setting processing 4 (S2750) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the display setting process 4 (S2750). The display setting process 4 (FIG. 91, S2750) in the eighth embodiment is the same as the display setting process (FIG. 38, S2103) in the first embodiment except for the process of S3015. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  As described above, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the stop symbol determination flag is copied, and even if the process of holding the flag during the next change is not performed, the previous stop symbol is determined to change the symbol. Or, it can be determined whether or not to perform a conversation announcement. Therefore, the process when the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 causes the third symbol to be stopped and displayed can be simplified. Therefore, the control load of the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113, and when the command is received by the audio lamp control unit 113, it is transmitted to the display control unit 114 in the audio lamp control unit 113. The command to be determined is determined, and thereafter, the command is configured to be transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, when the command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit 114 and the command is received by the display control unit 114, the display control unit 114 determines the command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control unit 113. After that, the display control device 114 may transmit the command to the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether the resident video RAM 235 for transfer destination or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 for transfer destination or the normal video RAM 236.

  In this case, it is determined that the image controller 237 accesses the resident video RAM 235 (that is, it is in use) to determine whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing (that is, using) the normal video RAM 236. ) May be provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

  Alternatively, the MPU 231 monitors a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235, or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 by the MPU 231, It may be checked whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts access to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 or ends the access, the MPU 231 notifies the MPU 231 of the information from the image controller 237 as needed. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the drive state of the image controller 237 or a notification from the image controller 237 whether the scan is in a blank period or not. If the scan state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each video RAM 235, 236 is not in use. As a result, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not the third symbol display device 81 is not in use.

  Also, in this case, the MPU 231 transfers data that is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When the information exists, the process of reading out the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be started according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since a predetermined address is defined, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to a display data table or the like by transferring image data according to transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, drawing of the sprite is performed. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for the above can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  The process of reading out image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a display main process or a loop of the main process executed by the MPU 231. As a result, in the MPU 231, transfer processing of image data can be executed using time during which important processing in the display control apparatus 114 such as command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing is not performed. In addition, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are processes that are executed prior to the display main process and the like, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt process or the V interrupt process. Transfer processing can be performed.

  In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage the video RAMs using the addresses held by the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236, but is commonly used by the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be allocated to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly designate the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or regular video RAM 236) to be accessed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, but merely designates the address, and The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or for the regular video RAM 236. That is, when designating the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply designated. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the instruction for performing the specification. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as an information indicating the storage destination of the data of the sprite, without using the storage RAM type, simply using the address set in the common address system. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the construction of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) connected to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. It may be connected directly to 237. Also, a bridge circuit is provided to convert the input / output specification of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specification of the mask ROM, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. It is also good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the premise of using a general mask ROM as the character ROM is used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a is used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to be able to directly access the character ROM 234.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and is configured by a large capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage unit, for example, a hard disk It may be done. Although such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 causes the image to be displayed without any problem at the time when it is desired to display by using the configuration described in the above embodiment. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, the character ROM 234 is provided with the NOR type ROM 234d, and the MPU 231 stores a part of the boot program to be executed first after releasing the system reset in the first program storage area 234d1. The first program storage area is provided in a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium that can perform read operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the MPU 231 first cancels the system reset in that area. A part of the boot program to be executed may be stored. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234 d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM) or the like is provided in the character ROM 234 and a first program storage area is provided thereon. It may store part of the boot program to be executed first.

  In the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program to be executed first in the area after releasing the system reset in the MPU 231 Is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium that can be read faster than the NAND flash memory 234a. The first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program to be executed first after the system reset release in the MPU 231 may be stored in the memory. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234 d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM) or the like may be provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area may be provided thereon. A part of the boot program to be executed first after system reset release may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, when it is detected in the ROM controller 234b that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is supplied from the power supply 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then, When it is detected that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated "0000H" in the ROM controller 234b, data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c, and the internal bus (bus line You may output to MPU231 via 240). In this case, when the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H" to the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, whether the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is already set in the buffer RAM 234c, Since the character ROM 234 is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is designated by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the display main processing in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect part or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can.

  When ROM controller 234 b detects that the address designated by internal bus (bus line 240) designates a control program stored in first program storage area 234 d 1, first program storage area 234 d 1 is detected. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be directly read out from the memory and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", so that the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect part or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can. In this case, the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may not be set in the buffer RAM 234c. Thus, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  Although the case where the resident video RAM 235 is provided by connecting to the image controller 237 has been described in the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. An internal bus (bus) to which the MPU 231, the character ROM 234 and the image controller 237 are connected It may be provided directly connected to the line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. When the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video is not necessary even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not directly connectable to the resident video RAM 235. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  Although the above embodiment describes the case where the display control device 114 is provided with one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236, the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more may be provided. A video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images according to various modes may be made resident, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above embodiment, although the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by the DRAM of one port type (one input / output port) is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. A type of RAM may be used. Thus, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed simultaneously. For example, while the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn, it is read from the character ROM 234 The process of writing the processed image data into the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The contents may be divided and the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in the respective areas. When a resident area and a normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by read or write processing by one of the resident area and the normal area. It is desirable to use a multiport RAM.

  The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, at least image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at least for residence in response to a received command received from the main control unit 110 or the audio lamp control unit 113 or other input from the outside. Preferably, it is resident in the video RAM 235.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is partially transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident is described, but all image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 You may In this case, since the image data stored in the nonresident character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. May be

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The main controller 110 or the audio lamp controller 113 If the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is largely different based on the command received from the image, the image data to be made resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated based on a predetermined timing. Good. In this case, while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period. Also, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is kept updated in the resident video RAM 235 without being updated even when the other resident images are updated. You may leave it. In addition, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out image data to be newly resident, and the read image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. It may be transferred while not in use (ie, during a period in which image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer instruction (transfer). Image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 according to data information), and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use (ie, while image data corresponding to the transition image is not read) You may do it.

  When the resident video RAM 235 is updated, image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is transferred using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. 3 It may be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident and transfer the read out image data through the buffer RAM 237a. It is also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237, which has received an instruction to transfer image data to be resident from the MPU 231, accesses the character ROM 234, reads image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the content of the resident video RAM 235 while the transition image is displayed, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  In the above embodiment, after all image data to be resident is made resident in the resident video RAM 235, a RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal or not is stored when power failure is eliminated. Before the transfer of the main image data at power on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is started in the display main process or the main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control unit 114 after turning on, the RAM judgment value is confirmed, If the RAM determination value is a normal value, this means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be normally stored, and thus the image data transfer to the resident video RAM 235 is not performed. It may be configured to In this case, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be made non-execution by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even when the system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and execution of the display main process or main process is started by the MPU 231, the data of the resident video RAM 235 is stored normally. In this case, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to shorten the time required for the power failure recovery. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, it is necessary to transfer the image data if the data of the resident video RAM 235 normally remains due to a momentary stop or the like. Since time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Alternatively, instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above embodiment, although the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured alone and connected directly to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Furthermore, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) with many data signal exchanges. Transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by

  In the above embodiment, the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a has been described as one block of the NAND flash memory 234a. However, the storage capacity is not necessarily limited to this and may be appropriately set. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a buffer period (blank period) during scanning on the blank area which is a scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed A data capacity sufficient to complete the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 may be used as the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a. Thereby, transfer from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 generated in this blank period. .

  Although the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described in the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the stored image data is transferred from the other buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. It may be configured. In addition, while an area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another image data is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Since processing can be performed, the time taken for the processing can be shortened.

  In the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after power-on. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. Thereby, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on. can do. Since image data is not read out from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after the power on of the power-on main image and image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image Although the case of transferring to 235 b has been described, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power on. Thus, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the third symbol display device 81 displays the image at power-on, while using the character ROM 234. The image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Since image data is not read out from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. Since image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while transferring image data corresponding to the image data, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is not sent from the character ROM 234 but through the buffer RAM 237a. It may be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. In addition, image data corresponding to the main image at power on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power on, and power is turned on using the image data corresponding to the main image stored in the normal video RAM 236. When image data is not read out from the resident video RAM 235 while transferring image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the hour main image, etc., Image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Thus, transfer of image data can be completed more quickly without intervention of the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 through the buffer RAM 237a, the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power activation fluctuation. Although the case of transferring to the image area 235 b has been described, while image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. Directly transfer image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and power-on fluctuation image from character ROM 234 directly to the power-on main image area 235a and power-on fluctuation image area 235b of resident video RAM 235 without passing through buffer RAM 237a. It is also good. Also, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on, and the power-on main image and power stored in the normal video RAM 236 While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuation image, the resident video RAM 235 If the image data is not read out from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Thus, transfer of image data can be completed more quickly without intervention of the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above embodiment, when the player operates the frame button 22, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a back image change command and a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the back image change command and the frame button. Although the case where the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of the super reach are changed based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the contents of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, according to the change of the gaming state. A rear image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thereby, the display control device 114 can change the back image or the effect mode of the super reach according to the game state based on the back image change command or the game state command. In addition, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10, and change the back image or the effect mode of the super reach according to the gaming state. Then, image data corresponding to at least a partial range of the rear image after the change or the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the presentation mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 From the resident area, the back image can be displayed immediately using the image data resident in the back image area 235c.

  Further, the display control device 114 may change the back image according to the definition of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the back image after the change is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. You may Here, when the image data of the back image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in the sub area, or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined such that a new back image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the audio lamp control device 113, and when the vibration error is detected by the audio lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Although the case where the warning image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 The controller 110 may detect a vibration error, and the main controller 110 may transmit an error command notifying the error to either the voice lamp controller 113 or the display controller 114. Then, when an error command is sent to the audio lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, and sends an error command for further notifying the display control device 114 of the error. May be

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may be configured to detect the presence or absence of the vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and further, the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is on in the display setting process (see FIG. 38). The warning image setting process (see FIG. 39) may be performed when it is determined, to display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. In this case, since it becomes unnecessary to transmit and receive the error command from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

  Moreover, although the case where the vibration sensor was attached to the back surface of the game board 13 was described in the said embodiment, it replaces with the vibration sensor or with the vibration sensor, a magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 It is also good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to suppress that the flow of the ball is changed by the magnetic field such as a magnet and the ball is intentionally entered into the ball entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, if the main controller 110 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is An error command to be transmitted may be sent from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit 114 via the audio lamp control unit 113 or directly. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field An error command that indicates an error may be transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, the image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is resident in the error message pictorial area 235 f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113 The display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 when receiving an error command from the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113 to transmit the magnetic field error. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, the display control device 114 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113. The warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. Thereby, the display control device 114 receives the error command from the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113, or recognizes the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor. Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235, an error message image for notifying a magnetic field error without delay is shown in FIG. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the third symbol display device 81, so that the player is not It can be suppressed.

  When the drawing content required to change the color tone of a part or all of one presentation is defined by the additional data table or the display data table, in the additional data table or the display data table, 1 in the third symbol display device 81 The type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed at that time corresponding to the address in which the time for which the image for the frame is displayed (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) is represented as one unit, and the change in the sprite It may define color information specifying a color tone. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452 d and the color tone after the change in the sprite. If color information to be displayed is specified, color information of the corresponding sprite type specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed. The drawing list may be created in place of the color information specified by the additional drawing content of the data table. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  In addition, when the drawing data necessary for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is defined by the display data table, in the display data table, the image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 In correspondence with the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) for displaying is displayed as one unit, at that time, the type of sprite to be replaced, the type of sprite to be newly displayed, and the new It may define the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, the MPU 231 displays the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the address indicated by the pointer 233f. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d, various sprites specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233 f Among them, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the type of sprite to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing content defined in the display data table. It may include transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data which is required when drawing an image according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying effects that can be additionally displayed. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines an effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates the drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. You may configure it.

  Thus, the image controller 237 can transfer image data of a sprite used in drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, effects to be additionally displayed can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 easily and reliably. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing drawing of the image based on the additional drawing content. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing content. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that causes the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table. Although the case of specifying only the drawing content corresponding to the super reach selected by the above has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table May be This makes it possible to easily identify the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player. Further, since it is not necessary to define drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress an increase in the data size of the display data table.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. The additional drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed may be defined in the additional data table. In this case, an additional data table buffer may be provided in the work RAM 233, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, the additional data table is defined not only for the additional drawing content but also including transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for drawing an image performed according to the additional drawing content. Good. This makes it possible to specify the rendering content of the effect to be additionally displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering, so from the additional data table and the transfer data table for addition The processing load required for the specification can be reduced as compared with the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are specified.

  In the above embodiment, the display control device 114 has described the case of preparing the display data table for each fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A display data table is prepared for each element such as "fluctuation start", "high speed fluctuation", "notice effect", "normal reach", "super reach", and the display data table is prepared according to the fluctuation pattern indicated in the display fluctuation pattern command. After identifying the elements necessary for the fluctuation production, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets necessary for the fluctuation production specified are put together into one, and the final periodic display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is generated. You may do so. For "variation start", "high-speed fluctuation", "normal reach", etc., a display common to each fluctuation pattern is often performed. Therefore, the data table can be efficiently provided by elementizing the fluctuation effect in this way and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element.

  In the above embodiment, in the display data table and the transfer data table, the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are specified from the address indicated by the pointer 233f using the common pointer 233f has been described. Alternatively, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every display interval of an image of one frame for ending the drawing processing (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interruption signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image of one frame. Since the driving of the third symbol display device 81 is always performed so that an image of one frame is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), a V interrupt signal is generated for each display of an image of one frame. By sending, it is possible to keep accurate without having to time its time interval.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer to which the drawn image is to be expanded based on the drawing object buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information expanded from the other frame buffer earlier. Has been described and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the image buffer 237 is a frame buffer to which the drawn image should be expanded each time the drawing list is received. May be alternately selected, and the previously developed image information may be read out from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Also, each time the image controller 237 transmits the image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 and the frame buffer to which the drawn image should be expanded. The frame buffer to be used may be switched.

  In the above embodiment, after the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main display unit 110 is notified via the audio lamp control device 113 until the finalized display effect is finished. When neither the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) nor the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received, the case of setting the demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect to the display data table buffer 233 d Although this has been described, the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233 d again. Also, in this case, until the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113, the finalized display effect is Each time the process is ended, the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. Thus, the finalized display effect can be continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the variation pattern command or the demonstration command is received from the main control device 110.

  In the above embodiment, a case was described where the demonstration effect was to change the back image and to stop and display the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers from "0" to "9". The present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol including the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semitransparent state. In addition, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. In addition, a character or a back image that is completely different from the third pattern or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In the above embodiment, in the display control means 114, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image after power-on from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and power on. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b and displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on after the transfer is completed, transferring the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display control means 114 first transfers only image data corresponding to the main image at power on after power on from the character ROM 234 to the power on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 at power on after power transfer is completed. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier after the power is turned on, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be checked in the operation check in the player, the person in charge of the hall, or the factory at the time of manufacture. It is possible to immediately confirm that the operation has started without any problems by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor the completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b. Thereby, when the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b and the display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 after that, the display fluctuation pattern command is received. Based on the above, it is possible to display a simple variation display on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. It is desirable that the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b be performed immediately after displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on. As a result, it is possible to more quickly perform the fluctuation display by the power-on fluctuation image.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table should be transferred to the contents of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing contents) or to that time, corresponding to the time that represents 20 milliseconds as one unit. Although the case of defining the information (transfer data information) of the image data has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the display content is defined at predetermined time intervals. The predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may define display contents every 1/30 seconds.

  Further, in the display data table, as a sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals, an address of the character ROM 234 where image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored instead of instructing the sprite type itself. May be defined. The display control device 114 reads the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. I manage the address of. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval in the display data table, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. There is no need to manage both the information specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the stored image data determination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and for each sprite, whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored. Although the case has been described, in place of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, when instructing transfer of image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and the predetermined image data It may be determined whether or not it has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and if it is not stored, an instruction to transfer image data of that predetermined sprite type may be set. When the MPU 231 sets a transfer instruction of image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above embodiment, when transferring image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. In the normal video RAM 236, if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored, the case where the MPU 231 performs the process of disabling the transfer process has been described. The process may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data determination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and it is determined whether the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. It may be stored. Also, the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in a work RAM provided in the image controller 237. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in this case, the MPU 231 sends an image to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. Alternatively, transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  Although the above embodiment has described the case where only the image data corresponding to “rear surface A” among the plurality of rear surface images is made to reside in the rear surface image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessarily limited thereto. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be made to reside in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the back image used in some super reach may be made to reside in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, transfer processing of image data from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed by making the back image of super reach expected to have a high or high frequency of occurrence resident in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. Can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the transfer instruction of the image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 transmits the transfer instruction at a predetermined time defined by the display pointer. Although the case of controlling the image controller 237 to transfer the image data instructed in step from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The display data is displayed at the top of the display data table. The MPU 231 describes information on the type of sprite required in the table, and the MPU 231 transfers the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. Controller 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the type of sprite to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of that image type is The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer data to the video RAM 236.

  In the above embodiment, the case of displaying a high-speed variation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player can not visually recognize is displayed when performing variation effects. Alternatively, all symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so as not to be visually recognized, or all symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image y in which a large number of white points are displayed randomly. .

  In the above embodiment, each time the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is updated in the main control unit 110 (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the main control unit Although the case of transmitting from the device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is increased in the main control unit 110, the holding number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223 b by one when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main controller 110 transmits the number-of-holds command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holds command can be reduced. The control load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the winnings to the first entrance 64 and the passing of the second entrance 67 are configured to be respectively suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of holding balls is limited to four times. It may be set to three or less times, or five or more times (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of balls in the variable display based on winning on the first entrance 64, the number of areas divided into four or a part of the third symbol display device 81 by the number of balls It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of holding balls is notified by the light emitting member You may configure it.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbols as identification information are scrolled in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a design along a predetermined path such as direction or L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of symbols, and, for example, one or more characters may be displayed in various ways along with the symbols or in addition to the symbols, or may be displayed in various ways. It also includes the effect display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In addition, the present invention may be implemented to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to slot machines and pachinko machines, various types of game machines may be implemented, such as arelapi and ball ball, game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols and does not include a handle for ball launch. The thing is mentioned. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  In addition, some or all of the embodiments and modifications described above may be implemented in combination.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be shown.

<Feature A group>
Based on display means for displaying identification information indicating at least a plurality of symbol rows indicating the result of the game determination result, display control means for displaying the identification information on the display means, and that the game determination result for the game is a hit Stop pattern determination means for causing the display control means to respectively display the same symbol as the identification information indicating the hit, and after the dynamic display of the identification information is started, stop by the identification information indicating the result of the determination A reach display mode in which other symbol rows of the plurality of symbol rows other than one symbol row are displayed with the same symbol before being displayed and a non-reach display manner different from the reach display manner and The symbol display control means for displaying at and the symbol display control means for displaying the combination in the non-reach display mode, one of the non-reach display modes in one symbol row The effect display means for displaying the related specific effect display by the one based on the indicated symbol and the one based on the symbol displayed in the other symbol row, and the content of the specific effect display displayed by the effect display means A gaming machine A1 comprising: bonus provision means for displaying the reach display mode by the symbol display control means when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the display means displays identification information indicating the result of determination of success or failure of the game including at least a plurality of symbol rows. Identification information is displayed on the display means by the display control means. Based on the fact that the game's success or failure judgment result is a hit, the stop symbol determination means causes the display control means to display the same symbol as the identification information indicating the hit. After starting the dynamic display of identification information, until it is stopped and displayed by the identification information indicating the result of the judgment, among the plurality of symbol rows, other symbol rows except one symbol row are the same symbol The reach display mode to be displayed and the non-reach display mode different from the reach display mode are displayed by the symbol display control means. Among the non-reach display modes, one based on the symbol displayed in one of the symbol rows and one based on the symbol displayed in the other symbol row among the non-reach display modes by the symbol display control means And the specific effect display related to is displayed by the effect display means. When the content of the specific effect display displayed by the effect display means satisfies the predetermined condition, the reach display mode is displayed by the privilege giving means by the symbol display control means. Thereby, even when the non-reach display mode is displayed, by displaying the specific effect display that satisfies the predetermined condition, it is possible to have an expectation for the jackpot. Thus, the player can play a game with the expectation of the jackpot. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored early in the game.

  In the gaming machine A1, the specific effect display is a first specific effect displayed related to the symbols displayed in the one symbol row and the other symbol row and the first condition is satisfied in the first specific effect And the second specific effect displayed in relation to the first specific effect, and the predetermined condition is satisfied when the second condition is satisfied in the second specific effect. A gaming machine A2 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exerted. That is, if the first specific effect displayed in relation to the symbols stopped and displayed in one symbol row and the other symbol row and the first condition are satisfied with the first specific effect, the first specific effect is At least a specific effect is configured by the second specific effect to be displayed in relation. When the second condition is satisfied in the second specific effect, the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, since a plurality of conditions are satisfied and displayed in the reach display mode, it is possible to gradually increase the player's expectation for the jackpot. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved by the specific effect.

  In the gaming machine A2, the symbols displayed by the one symbol row and the other symbol row are respectively constituted by a plurality of different symbols having a specific symbol, and the first specific effect of the specific effect display is A comment is displayed by each of the symbol pattern displayed in the one symbol row and the symbol pattern displayed in the other symbol row, and the combination of the comments is a predetermined combination. A game machine A3 characterized in that the first condition is established.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exerted. That is, one symbol row and another symbol row are respectively configured by a plurality of different symbols having a specific symbol. The symbol pattern displayed in one symbol row and the symbol pattern displayed in another symbol row and a comment are displayed respectively, and when the combination of the comments is a predetermined combination, the first The first specific effect of the specific effect display is configured such that the condition is satisfied. As a result, the player can be easily informed whether the first condition is satisfied or not by the combination of the comments. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily play the game.

  In the gaming machine A2, the one symbol row and the other symbol row are respectively constituted by a plurality of different symbols having a particular pattern, and the second specific effect of the specific effect display is the one symbol row Achieved dynamic display mode that satisfies the second condition and unachieved dynamic display that does not satisfy the second condition, in which the pattern of the symbol displayed in the pattern and the pattern of the symbol displayed in the other symbol row are displayed respectively A game machine A4 characterized in that at least one of the modes is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exerted. That is, one symbol row and another symbol row are respectively configured by a plurality of different symbols having a specific symbol. Achievement dynamic display mode that satisfies the second condition that the pattern of the symbol displayed stopped in one symbol row and the symbol of the symbol displayed stopped in the other symbol row are not satisfied and the second condition is not achieved At least one of the dynamic display mode is displayed in the second specific effect of the specific effect display. As a result, by displaying the symbol of the stopped symbol even when the second specific effect is performed, it is possible to inform the player that it is still in the middle of the lottery game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily play the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the display control means dynamically displays the plurality of symbol rows by scrolling in a predetermined direction, and the symbols are displayed in the non-reach display mode by the symbol display control means. A game machine A5 characterized by scrolling and dynamically displaying a symbol row other than the one displayed in the non-reach display mode while being displayed.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are exerted. That is, a plurality of symbol rows are dynamically displayed by scrolling display in a predetermined direction by the display control means. Even while being displayed in the non-reach display mode by the symbol display control means, the symbol rows other than those displayed in the non-reach display mode are scrolled and displayed dynamically by the display control means. Thus, even when the specific effect display is displayed, the player can easily identify that the dynamic display of the identification information is being performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily play the game.

<Feature B group>
It has a main control means for executing control of a game and a slave control means for executing control of the game upon receiving a control signal from the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the start condition. A success / failure determination means for executing a success / failure determination, and a success / failure determination signal generation means for generating a success / failure determination signal indicating a success / failure determination result by the success / failure determination means, and outputting the signal to the slave control means; The secondary control means is a display means for displaying identification information for informing the result of the determination on the basis of the success / failure determination signal comprising at least a plurality of symbol rows, and a display control means for displaying the identification information on the display means. And stopping symbol determining means for determining symbols for stopping and displaying the plurality of symbol rows as the identification information indicating the determination result of the success or failure based on the success or failure determination signal; In a gaming machine in which a game is executed, the slave control means displays a specific effect display related to the stop symbol of the lottery game executed one before on the display means based on the start of the next lottery game It has a feature display means to perform, and a benefit effect display means for displaying a benefit effect when the content of the specific effect display displayed by the effect display means satisfies a predetermined condition. Game machine B1.

  According to the gaming machine B1, in the main control means for executing the control of the game, the success or failure judgment is executed by the success or failure judgment means based on the establishment of the start condition. A success or failure determination signal indicating the result of the success or failure determination by the success or failure determination means is generated by the success or failure determination signal generation means, and is output to the slave control means for executing game control in accordance with the control signal output from the main control means. In the secondary control means, the display means displays identification information for notifying of the result of determination on the basis of the determination result of at least a plurality of symbol rows. Identification information is displayed on the display means by the display control means. A symbol for stopping and displaying a plurality of symbol rows is determined by the stop symbol determination means as identification information indicating the result of the determination based on the determination result. The specific effect display related to the stop symbol of the lottery game executed one before is displayed by the effect display means on the display means based on the start of the next lottery game. When the content of the specific effect display displayed by the effect display means satisfies the predetermined condition, the benefit effect is displayed by the benefit effect display means. Thereby, since the specific effect display related to the stop symbol of the previous lottery game is displayed, it is possible to show the player two lottery games like one lottery game. Further, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the bonus effect is displayed, so that the game can be enjoyed more. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early in the game.

  In the gaming machine B1, the slave control means has stop symbol determination means for determining the stop symbol of the previous lottery game, and the effect display means of the slave control means is predetermined by the stop symbol determination means. The gaming machine B2 characterized in that the specific effect display is displayed based on the fact that it is determined that the stop symbol is determined.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the slave control means, the stop symbol of the previous lottery game is determined by the stop symbol determination means. The specific effect display is displayed by the effect display means based on the fact that the stop symbol determination means determines that the stop symbol is predetermined. Thereby, the trigger for displaying the specific effect can be made random, and there is an effect that fresh taste can be given by executing the specific effect.

  In the gaming machine B1, the main control means is an acquisition means for acquiring the pass / fail judgment information to be judged by the pass / fail judgment means based on the establishment of the start condition, and the acceptance judgment information obtained by the acquisition means Storage means for storing until the condition is established, prior determination means for determining the result of determination on the basis of the determination result on the basis of the determination result on the basis of the determination result stored in the storage means, and the identification information Dynamic display mode determining means for determining one of the plurality of dynamic display modes based on the determination result of dynamic display mode for causing the display means to dynamically display the dynamic display mode; Prior dynamic display mode discriminating means for discriminating a dynamic display mode to be determined by the dynamic display mode determining means before the lottery condition is established based on the discrimination information discriminated by the prior discrimination means A plurality of advance signal generation means for generating an advance signal indicating the determination result of the advance dynamic display mode determination means and the advance determination means, and outputting the signal to the slave control means; In the dynamic display mode, a predetermined specific dynamic display mode is set, and the effect display means of the slave control means determines that the specific dynamic display mode is determined by the advance signal. In this case, the gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect display is displayed in association with the stop symbol of the lottery game immediately before the identification information dynamically displayed in the specific dynamic display mode. B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the main control means, the success / failure determination information to be judged by the success / failure determination means based on the establishment of the start condition is acquired by the acquisition means. The success / failure determination information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored by the storage unit until the lottery condition is established. Based on the success / failure determination information stored in the storage means, the success / failure determination result is determined by the prior determination means before the lottery condition is established. The dynamic display mode for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means among the plurality of dynamic display modes on the basis of the result of the determination of yes or no. The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is determined by the preliminary dynamic display mode determining means based on the determination information determined by the preliminary determination means before the lottery condition is established. An advance signal indicating the determination result of the advance dynamic display mode determination means and the advance determination means is generated by the advance signal generation means and output to the sub control means. The plurality of dynamic display modes are set to predetermined specific dynamic display modes. If the subordinate control means determines that the specific dynamic display mode is determined by the advance signal, it is related to the stop symbol of the lottery game immediately preceding the identification information dynamically displayed in the specific dynamic display mode. The specific display effect is displayed by the effect display means. Thereby, when the specific dynamic display mode is displayed, the specific effect display can be displayed, as if the lottery game continues from the lottery game immediately before the specific dynamic display mode. It can make the player think. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that gives the player a fresh impression.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the main control means is a player after the same symbols are respectively displayed on the plurality of symbol rows, which are the identification information indicating that the success or failure judgment result is a hit. The jackpot game execution means for giving a benefit advantageous to the above, and the slave control means causes the plurality of symbol rows to be dynamically displayed, and then is stopped and displayed by the identification information indicating the result of the determination of the acceptance or rejection. In the meantime, among the plurality of symbol rows, other symbol rows except one symbol row are displayed in the same reach display mode in which the same symbol is displayed and in the non reach reach mode different from the reach display mode. And a bonus effect display unit of the slave control unit displays the bonus effect for notifying the player in advance whether or not the reach display mode is displayed. Machine B4

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the main control means, after the same symbol is displayed in each of a plurality of symbol rows which are identification information indicating that the result of the determination is a hit, a bonus which is advantageous to the player is given by the jackpot game execution means Be done. In the secondary control means, after a plurality of symbol rows are dynamically displayed, until one of the plurality of symbol rows is displayed until it is stopped and displayed with identification information indicating the result of the determination, another symbol row is excluded. The symbol display control means displays the reach display mode in which the symbol row is displayed with the same symbol and the non-reach display mode different from the reach display mode. A bonus effect for notifying the player in advance whether or not the reach display mode is displayed is displayed by the bonus effect display means. As a result, by displaying the bonus effect, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the jackpot. Therefore, the player can play the game expecting the bonus effect to be displayed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early in the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the symbols constituting the plurality of symbol rows are respectively constituted by a plurality of different symbols having a specific symbol, and the specific effect display is one symbol of the stop symbols. A comment is displayed by each of the symbol pattern displayed stop in the column and the symbol pattern stopped and displayed in the other symbol row and the comment is a predetermined combination. A game machine B5 characterized in that the above is established.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects can be achieved. That is, the symbols constituting the plurality of symbol rows are respectively configured by the plurality of different symbols having the specific pattern. When a comment is displayed by each of the symbols of the symbols displayed in the one symbol row and the symbols of the symbols stopped and displayed in the other row among the symbols, and the combination of the comments is a predetermined combination The specific effect display is configured such that the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, the player can be easily informed whether the first condition is satisfied or not by the combination of the comments. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily play the game.

<Feature C group>
The judgment means for judging the success or failure of the game, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the judgment result of the judgment by the success / failure judgment means, the display control means for displaying the identification information on the display means, and the identification information A dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode to be dynamically displayed on the display means, and the display means displays the identification information indicating that the result of the pass / fail determination is a hit, the player In the gaming machine where the bonus game which is advantageous to the game is started, the display means starts the dynamic display in the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, and then the pass / fail is made. The auxiliary information display means for displaying the information relating to the game separately from the identification information while the identification information indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed, the plurality of instruction symbols are displayed on the display means indicate It has an indicator display means, and an auxiliary display mode control means for displaying a display mode related to one indication symbol among the indication symbols displayed by the indication symbol display means on the auxiliary information display means. A game machine C1 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine C1, the success or failure of the game is determined by the success or failure determination means. The display means displays identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination means. Identification information is displayed on the display means. A dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. When the display means displays identification information indicating that the determination result is a hit, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is started. Information related to the game from the start of the dynamic display in the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means to the identification information to the stop display of the identification information indicating the result of the determination of the acceptance or rejection The display means is provided with an auxiliary information display means in which is displayed separately from the identification information. An indication symbol indicating each of a plurality of display modes is displayed on the display means by the indication symbol display means. Among the command symbols displayed by the command symbol display means, the display mode related to one command symbol is displayed on the auxiliary information display means by the auxiliary display mode control means. Thereby, the player can be made to pay attention to the information displayed on the auxiliary information display means. Therefore, the player can play the game paying attention to the information displayed on the auxiliary information display means, and the interest of the game can be improved. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early in the game.

  In the gaming machine C1, an instruction symbol determination means for determining two or more of the indication symbols from among the plurality of indication symbols based on the result of the determination on the indication symbols displayed on the indication symbol display means, and the indication symbol determination The display mode of the auxiliary information display means is displayed in the display mode related to the instruction symbol by the auxiliary display mode control means based on the result of the determination of the two or more of the indication symbols determined by the means. And a display instruction symbol determination means for determining the instruction symbol.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exerted. That is, two or more designated symbols are selected from the plurality of designated symbols to be displayed on the designated symbol display means by the designated symbol determination means based on the result of the pass / fail determination. The instruction to display the display mode of the auxiliary information display means in the display mode related to the instruction pattern by the auxiliary display mode control means from among the two or more instruction patterns determined by the instruction pattern determination means based on the result of the determination of yes or no The symbol is determined by the display instruction symbol determining means. As a result, two or more designated symbols are determined based on the result of the determination of yes or no, so that the player can guess the result of determination of the yes or no according to the type of the designated symbol displayed on the auxiliary information display means. Therefore, the display mode of the auxiliary information display means is displayed in the display mode related to the instruction symbol determined based on the result of the determination of the success or failure, so that the player can be expected to predict the result of the further detailed determination of success or failure. is there.

  In the gaming machine C1, the instruction pattern for displaying the display mode of the auxiliary information display means in the display mode related to the instruction pattern is determined by the auxiliary display mode control means based on the plurality of indication patterns based on the result of determination of acceptance or rejection. In addition to the first indication symbol determination means and the indication symbols determined by the first indication symbol determination means, the indication symbols to be displayed on the auxiliary information display means are selected from among the plurality of indication symbols based on the result of determination of acceptance or rejection. A game machine C3 characterized by having a second instruction symbol determining means for determining.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the first indication pattern determination means determines the indication pattern for displaying the display mode of the auxiliary information display means in the indication manner related to the indication pattern by the auxiliary display mode control means from the plurality of indication patterns based on the result of the judgment. . In addition to the indication symbols determined by the first indication symbol determination means, the indication symbols to be displayed on the auxiliary information display means are determined by the second indication symbol determination means from among the plurality of indication symbols based on the result of determination of acceptance or rejection. As a result, the player can predict the result of the determination on the basis of the type of the indication symbol displayed on the auxiliary information display means. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the game more and to suppress the player from getting bored early in the game.

  A gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, comprising display position determining means for determining the display position of each of the indication symbols displayed on the auxiliary information display means by predetermined lottery control. C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, since the display position of each indication symbol displayed on the auxiliary information display means is determined by the predetermined lottery control by the display position determination means, the indication symbol is displayed There is an effect that the position becomes more random and the player can give a fresh taste.

<Feature D group>
It has a main control means for executing control of the game and a slave control means for executing control of the game in accordance with a control signal from the main control means, and the main control means performs the game based on the establishment of the start condition. The success / failure determination means for executing the success / failure determination, and the success / failure determination signal generation means for generating the success / failure determination signal indicating the result of the success / failure determination by the critical determination means; Display means for displaying identification information indicating the result of determination of success or failure based on the success / failure determination signal, and display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, based on establishment of the start condition In the gaming machine in which the lottery game is performed by starting the dynamic display of the identification information, the main control means causes the slave control means to display an identification information indicating the result of the determination on the yes or no. Generate Identification information generation means for determining the identification information indicating the result of the determination on the basis of the identification signal based on the identification signal; Storage means in which identification information indicating a determination result is stored, and the display control means of the slave control means, when starting a new lottery game, based on the establishment of the start condition, Identification information discriminating means for discriminating identification information indicating the result of the determination of the success or failure displayed in the previous lottery game, and the identification information based on the identification information discriminated by the previous identification information discriminating means Initial dynamic display setting means for executing setting to start dynamic display of the new lottery game identification information from the information and the initial dynamic display setting means make the setting, and then the identification information determination means is determined A storage in which identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the new lottery game is overwritten in the identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the previous lottery game stored in the storage unit and stored in the storage unit Dynamic display stop means for executing stop of dynamic display at timing when the identification information of the new lottery game determined by the identification information determination means stored in the control means and the storage means is dynamically displayed; A game machine D1 characterized by having:

  According to the gaming machine D1, control of the game is executed by the main control means. Control of the game is executed by the slave control means in accordance with the control signal from the main control means. In the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the start condition, the success or failure judgment of the game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. A pass / fail judgment signal indicating the result of the pass / fail judgment by the critical decision means is generated by the pass / fail judgment signal generating means. In the secondary control means, the display means displays identification information indicating the result of the determination of the success or failure based on the success / failure determination signal from the main control means. The identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the display control means. Dynamic display of identification information is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and a lottery game is performed. In the main control means, the identification signal generation means generates and outputs an identification signal for displaying the identification information indicating the result of the pass / fail judgment on the sub control means. In the slave control means, based on the identification signal, the identification information indicating the determination result of the pass / fail is determined by the identification information determination means. The storage means stores identification information indicating the determination result of the determination made by the identification information determination means. In the display control means of the slave control means, when starting a new lottery game based on the establishment of the start condition of the slave control means, the success or failure displayed in the lottery game one before the new lottery game The identification information indicating the determination result is determined by the previous identification information determination means. On the basis of the identification information determined by the previous identification information determination means, the setting for starting dynamic display of identification information of a new lottery game from the identification information is executed by the initial dynamic display setting means. After the initial dynamic display setting means makes the setting, identification information indicating the result of determination of success or failure of the new lottery game determined by the identification information determination means is the previous lottery game stored in the storage means by the storage control means The identification information indicating the success / failure determination result of the above is overwritten and stored in the storage unit. The dynamic display stop unit executes stop of the dynamic display at the timing when the identification information of the new lottery game determined by the identification information determination unit stored in the storage unit is dynamically displayed. As a result, there is no need to store both a new lottery game and the previous lottery game for the identification information indicating the result of the determination, reducing the amount of data stored in the storage area of the storage means. Can. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of data of the storage means.

  In the gaming machine D1, the slave control means displays a specific effect display related to the identification information determined by the previous identification information determination means on the display means based on the start of the next new lottery game. A game comprising: an effect display means; and an effect effect display means for displaying an effect effect when the content of the specific effect display displayed by the effect display means satisfies a predetermined condition. Machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the secondary control means, the specific effect display related to the identification information determined by the previous identification information determination means is displayed by the effect display means on the display means based on the start of the next new lottery game. When the content of the specific effect display displayed by the effect display means satisfies the predetermined condition, the benefit effect is displayed by the benefit effect display means. Thereby, since the specific effect associated with the identification information displayed in the immediately preceding lottery game is displayed based on the start of a new lottery game, it appears as if the dynamic display of identification information is continuing. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make two lottery games look like one lottery game.

In the gaming machine D2,
The effect display means displays the specific effect display when the identification information determined by the previous identification information determination means is predetermined identification information determined in advance. Machine D3.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D2, when the identification information determined by the identification information determining means last time is predetermined identification information determined in advance, the specific effect display is performed by the effect display means As it is displayed, the specific effect display is displayed on a random occasion, and there is an effect that the player can provide an effect having a fresh taste.

<Feature E>
Pass / fail judgment means for executing a game's hit / fail judgment,
Display means for displaying identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination means;
Display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means;
Dynamic display mode determination means for determining one of the plurality of dynamic display modes as the dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification information;
A gaming machine having operation means operable by a player;
The plurality of dynamic display modes include a specific dynamic display mode in which display of the first specific effect display and the second specific effect display is preset.
The display period of the first specified effect display is extended based on the player operating the operation means within the displayed period of the first specified effect display, while the display period of the first specified effect display is displayed. First specified effect adjustment means for shortening the display period of the first specified effect display based on the fact that the operation means has not been operated by the player for a predetermined time;
When the display period of the first specified effect display is extended by the first specified effect adjustment means, the display period of the second specified effect display is shortened, while the first specified effect adjustment means reduces the first specified effect adjusted means. A game machine E1 comprising: second specified effect adjustment means for extending the display period of the second specified effect display when the display period of the specified effect display is shortened.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the success or failure judgment of the game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. The display means displays identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination means. The identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the display control means. One of the plurality of dynamic display modes for dynamically displaying the identification information is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. The plurality of dynamic display modes include a specific dynamic display mode in which display of the first specific effect display and the second specific effect display is preset. The display period of the first specified effect display is extended by the first specified effect adjustment means based on the player operating the operation means within the display period of the first specified effect display. In addition, the display period of the first specified effect display is shortened by the first specified effect adjusting unit based on the fact that the player does not operate the operation means for a predetermined time within the display period of the first specified effect display. Ru. When the display period of the first specified effect display is extended by the first specified effect adjustment means, the display period of the second specified effect display is shortened by the second specified effect adjustment means. Further, when the display period of the first specified effect display is shortened by the first specified effect adjusting means, the displayed period of the second specified effect display is extended by the second specified effect adjusting means. As a result, it is possible to adjust the effect time as intended by the player while suppressing the change in the display period in which the first and second specified effects are combined. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with an effect more tailored to the player.

  Each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine, and a gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed on a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the winning opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided. The dynamic display of identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

Each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in processing for controlling a gaming machine, control of gaming is performed by storing the created data in storage means in order to use it for control processing.
In such pachinko machines, gaming machines have been proposed in which the increase in the amount of data stored in storage means required to execute game control has been suppressed (e.g. 2012-65722 gazette).
In this type of pachinko machine, there has been a demand for a gaming machine in which the amount of data stored in the storage means is further reduced.
The present technical concept is made to solve the problems and the like exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing an increase in the amount of data stored in storage means.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 has main control means for executing control of the game and slave control means for executing control of the game in accordance with a control signal from the main control means. The main control means is a success / failure determination means for executing a game success / failure determination based on the establishment of the start condition, and a success / failure determination signal generation means for generating a success / failure determination signal indicating the result of the success / failure determination by the critical determination means. , And the secondary control means is a display means for displaying identification information indicating a result of determination on the basis of the determination result from the main control means, and a display for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information. Control means, and based on the establishment of the start condition, dynamic display of the identification information is started to perform a lottery game, and the main control means is configured to Identification information indicating the judgment result Identification information generation means for generating and outputting an identification signal for indicating, and the slave control means determining identification information indicating the result of the determination on the basis of the identification signal; And storage means for storing identification information indicating the determination result of the qualification determined by the identification information determination means, and the display control means of the slave control means is configured to select a new lottery based on establishment of the start condition. When the game is started, it is determined by the previous identification information determination means for determining the identification information indicating the result of the determination of the acceptance or rejection displayed in the lottery game immediately before the new lottery game, and the previous identification information determination means Initial dynamic display setting means for executing setting for starting dynamic display of the new lottery game identification information from the identification information based on the identified information, and the initial dynamic display setting means for performing the setting The Later, identification information indicating the determination result of the new lottery game determined by the identification information determination unit is overwritten on the identification information indicating the determination result of the previous lottery game stored in the storage unit. Stop the dynamic display at the timing when the identification information of the new lottery game determined by the storage control means stored in the storage means and the identification information determination means stored in the storage means is dynamically displayed And a dynamic display stopping means for performing
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, the slave control unit is configured to display a specific effect display related to the identification information determined by the previous identification information determination unit. An effect display means for displaying on the display means based on the start of a great lottery game, and a benefit effect display for displaying a benefit effect when the content of the specific effect display displayed by the effect display means satisfies a predetermined condition And means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the control of the game is executed by the main control means. Control of the game is executed by the slave control means in accordance with the control signal from the main control means.
In the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the start condition, the success or failure judgment of the game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. A pass / fail judgment signal indicating the result of the pass / fail judgment by the critical decision means is generated by the pass / fail judgment signal generating means.
In the secondary control means, the display means displays identification information indicating the result of the determination of the success or failure based on the success / failure determination signal from the main control means. The identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the display control means. Dynamic display of identification information is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and a lottery game is performed.
In the main control means, the identification signal generation means generates and outputs an identification signal for displaying the identification information indicating the result of the pass / fail judgment on the sub control means. In the slave control means, based on the identification signal, the identification information indicating the determination result of the pass / fail is determined by the identification information determination means. The storage means stores identification information indicating the determination result of the determination made by the identification information determination means.
In the display control means of the slave control means, when starting a new lottery game based on the establishment of the start condition of the slave control means, the success or failure displayed in the lottery game one before the new lottery game The identification information indicating the determination result is determined by the previous identification information determination means. On the basis of the identification information determined by the previous identification information determination means, the setting for starting dynamic display of identification information of a new lottery game from the identification information is executed by the initial dynamic display setting means.
After the initial dynamic display setting means makes the setting, identification information indicating the result of determination of success or failure of the new lottery game determined by the identification information determination means is the previous lottery game stored in the storage means by the storage control means The identification information indicating the success / failure determination result of the above is overwritten and stored in the storage unit. The dynamic display stop unit executes stop of the dynamic display at the timing when the identification information of the new lottery game determined by the identification information determination unit stored in the storage unit is dynamically displayed.
As a result, there is no need to store both a new lottery game and the previous lottery game for the identification information indicating the result of the determination, reducing the amount of data stored in the storage area of the storage means. Can. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of data of the storage means.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, in the secondary control means, the specific effect display related to the identification information determined by the previous identification information determination means is displayed by the effect display means on the display means based on the start of the next new lottery game. When the content of the specific effect display displayed by the effect display means satisfies the predetermined condition, the benefit effect is displayed by the benefit effect display means.
Thereby, since the specific effect associated with the identification information displayed in the immediately preceding lottery game is displayed based on the start of a new lottery game, it appears as if the dynamic display of identification information is continuing. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make two lottery games look like one lottery game.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means )

Claims (2)

Determining means for performing the determination;
Display means for displaying identification information comprising at least a plurality of symbol rows for notifying of the determination result by the determination means;
A game machine having dynamic display means for displaying the symbols in the plurality of symbol rows in combination for showing the determination result after the plurality of symbol rows are dynamically displayed;
The dynamic display means displays a reach display mode in which a symbol other than one of the plurality of symbol rows is stopped and displayed with a combination of symbols which can be a combination for indicating the specific determination result. Can be configured to
The gaming machine is
Dynamic display mode determination means for determining one dynamic display mode from a plurality of dynamic display modes based on the determination result as the dynamic display mode for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information;
After being displayed in a combination different from the reach display mode in the dynamic display executed one time ago, all symbol columns are stopped and displayed, and the specific effect display related to the stopped symbol is displayed next to it Effect display means that can be displayed on the display means based on the start of dynamic display;
Special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect for displaying the symbol row in the reach display mode when the content of the specific effect display displayed by the effect display means satisfies a predetermined condition And have
For the plurality of dynamic display modes, a predetermined specific dynamic display mode is set,
The effect display means is configured to display the specific effect display associated with the symbol displayed after the dynamic display immediately preceding the identification information dynamically displayed in the specific dynamic display mode,
A game machine characterized in that the identification information is dynamically displayed during a period in which the specific effect display is displayed.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display means is constituted by a liquid crystal display.

Images